Nissan 2011 Altima Owners Manual Owner's

2015-09-07

: Nissan Nissan-2011-Altima-Owners-Manual-762732 nissan-2011-altima-owners-manual-762732 nissan pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 446

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2011

ALTI MA
OWNER’S MANUAL

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

FOREWORD

READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.

WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.

Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.

● NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.

● ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification
could
affect
its
performance, safety or durability, and
may
even
violate
governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING

All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and without obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:

WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.

APD1005

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.

CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTH威 is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon and
Clarion.
XM Radio威 requires
subscription, sold
separately. Not
available in Alaska,
Hawaii or Guam. For
more information,
visit www.xmradio.com.

© 2010 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
information.centre@nissancanada.com

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

Table of
Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-12

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1.
2.
3.

Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-27)
Rear seat belts (P. 1-14)
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)
5. Head Restraints (P. 1-10)
6. Front seat belts (P. 1-14)
7. Side-impact air bag pressure sensor
(driver’s side shown; passenger’s side
similar) (P. 1-57)
8. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-41)
9. Seats (P. 1-2)
10. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) (P. 1-50)
11. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-55)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-25)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2001

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
Coupe

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Power windows (P. 2-43)
Windshield (P. 8-21)
Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
Engine hood (P. 3-23)
Tie down (P. 6-14)
Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-34)
Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Tire pressure (P. 8-38)
Flat tire (P. 6-2)
Tire chains (P. 8-46)
Mirrors (P. 3-29)
Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,
keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)

LII0114

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

Sedan

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII0094

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR REAR
Coupe

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-29)
Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)
Trunk lid (P. 3-23)
Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)
Opener operation (P. 3-23)
Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)
Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)

WII0125

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

Sedan

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

LII0095

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Interior trunk access (P. 1-8)
Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-46)
Sun visors (P. 3-28)
Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-49)
HomeLink姞 universal transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
6. Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) (P. 3-29)
7. Glove box (P. 2-41)
8. Front cup holders (P. 2-40)
9. Front console (P. 2-41)
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)
11. Rear seat (P. 1-8)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WII0126

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

INSTRUMENT PANEL
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
WIC1598

1.
2.

Vents (P. 4-18)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-29)

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetooth姞 Hands-free
Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-95, P. 4-91, P. 4-106)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

17.
18.

19.

Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-41, P. 2-35)
Cruise control main/set switch
(P. 5-20)
Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-34)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-51)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-41)
Glove box (P. 2-41)
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
Covered storage box (P. 2-42)
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(P. 4-26)
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(P. 4-19)
Shift selector (P. 5-11)
Audio system controls (if so equipped)/
Storage (if so equipped)
(P. 4-29, P.2-42)
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-28)

20.
21.
22.

Vehicle information display controls
(P. 2-17)
Hood release (P. 3-23)
Trunk opener (P. 3-23)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-36)
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.

Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-15, 8-15)
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)
5. Fuse block (P. 8-23)
6. Battery (P. 8-16)
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-15)
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI0553

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

VQ35DE engine

1.
2.
3.

LDI0552

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning
light

Name

Page

Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light

2-11

Brake warning light

Warning
light

2-11

Charge warning
light

2-11

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) check warning light (if so
equipped)

2-12

Engine oil pressure
warning light

2-12

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Indicator
light

Name

Page

Low tire pressure
warning light

2-12

Cruise set switch
indicator light

2-15

Master warning light

2-13

Front passenger air
bag status light

2-15

Seat belt warning
light and chime

2-14

High beam indicator
light (blue)

2-15

Supplemental air
bag warning light

2-14

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-15

Name

Page

Security indicator
light

2-27

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) position indicator light (if so
equipped)

2-14

Slip indicator light

2-16

Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights

2-16

Cruise main switch
indicator light

2-14

Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light

2-16

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped for driver’s seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Installing top tether strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56
Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

SEATS
● The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.

CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
ARS1152

WARNING
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

WRS0738

WRS0739

Forward and backward

Reclining

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.

WRS0740

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position with the parking brake fully
applied.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

WRS0841

Coupe

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped for driver’s seat)
Operating tips
WARNING
Before driving the vehicle, return the seatback to an upright seating position after
manually releasing it. Also, make sure the
seat is locked in place. Failure to do so
may cause the seat to move in a collision
or sudden stop. This may result in damage
to the seat or personal injury.

CAUTION
● Do not operate the power recline switch
when the seatback has been manually
released using the upper seatback re1 . Doing so can damage
lease lever 䊊
the seat.
● Do not pull on the upper seatback release lever or the trim to return the
seatback to a normal seating position.
Doing so may damage the seat.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.

hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking
brake fully applied.

WRS0751

Sedan
● Pull up on the upper seatback release lever
Reclining
to release the seatback only. Push the seatMove the recline switch backward until the deback forward to allow for access to items
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
behind the front seat. Push the seatback to
forward again, move the switch forward and
the rear of the vehicle to return the seatback
move your body forward. The seatback will move
to the upright and locked position. The upforward.
per seatback release lever does not need to
be used.

Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

WRS0842

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

WRS0743

Type A

Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)

Lumbar support (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)

Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angle
and height of the seat cushion.

The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Push the switch (Type A)
forward or backward or move the lever (Type B)
up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0843

Type B

Operating tips:
● The seatback and track will not lock until the
seatback is returned rearward.
● The seatback will return to the first locking
notch when using the seat recliner lever.

WRS0739

Entry to the rear seat from outside of
the vehicle (if so equipped for Coupe
models)
Pull the seat recliner lever to the uppermost position folding the seatback forward, releasing the
seat track.
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
rear seat.

WRS0791

Exiting from the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, using the upper
seatback release lever (if so equipped
for Coupe models)
1 to the
Pull the upper seatback release lever 䊊
uppermost position, folding the seatback forward
2 , releasing the seat track.
䊊

To return the seat to a locked position:

Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rear
seat.

Push the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked.

To return the seat to a locked position:
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seatback and track are locked.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Operating tips:

1. Open the access cover on the rear parcel
shelf.

● The seatback and track will not lock until the
seat back is returned rearward.

2. Push down on the button on the rear parcel
shelf.

● The seatback will return to an upright seating
position if the upper seatback release lever
is pulled to the uppermost position.

3. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.
To remove or reinstall the seatback release button access covers, see “Upper tether anchor/key
cylinder covers” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0794

FOLDING REAR SEAT
Interior trunk access
The trunk can be accessed from the passenger
side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as
shown.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.

WRS0745

To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat,
reach through the opening and pull on the strap
1 located behind the seat.
䊊

WRS0167

Center armrest (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.

The rear seats can be locked using the mechanical key to prevent unauthorized access. For more
information on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been removed. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.

LRS0893

The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. All of the head
restraints are adjustable.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.

WRS0921

Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
5. Release knob

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0134

Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.

LRS0888

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

LRS0889

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint before an occupant uses the seating
position.

WRS0922

Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the adjustable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and release
knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2026

Install
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.

Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described in this section.

SPA1025

Front-seat Active Head Restraints
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utilizing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occupant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

SEAT BELTS

SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0134

WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.

SSS0016

WARNING
● The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
● Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.

SSS0014

WARNING
● Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.

● If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
● No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious personal injury.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Once a seat belt pretensioner has activated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
● Removal and installation of pretensioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
● All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
● All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.

PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.

WRS0738

Manual front seat shown

Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.

LRS0594
2
䊊

Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
● The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

LRS0595
3
䊊

䊊
4

Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child restraints” later in this section for more information.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension.

WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt operation, see a NISSAN dealer.

WRS0139

Unfastening the seat belts
1
䊊

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

LRS0242

Shoulder belt height adjustment
(Sedan, front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. To
1 and
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired
2 , so the belt passes over the center of
position 䊊
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING
● After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.

WARNING
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.

● The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.

● Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
LRS0821

Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)
The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easier
access to the shoulder belt. The arm can also be
folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier
access.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.

CHILD SAFETY
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
● Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
● Rear-facing child restraint
● Forward-facing child restraint
● Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child restraints” later in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
belt. See the “Child restraints” section for more
information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.

INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forwardfacing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.

LARGER CHILDREN
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoulder belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdomen. The booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat
can only be used in seating positions that have a
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.

ARS1098

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS

WRS0256

WARNING
● Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.

– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” later
in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

– Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system” later in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
WRS0795

LATCH system lower anchor locations

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

WRS0700

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

WRS0829

(if so equipped)

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0662

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.

LRS0824

WRS0797

Top tether anchor point locations
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “Installing top tether strap” later in this section.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
1 are located on the rear parcel
Anchor points 䊊
shelf.

(if so equipped)

WRS0801

Rear-facing web-mounted – step 3

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1 , pull the
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap 䊊
2 .
flap down to allow access to the anchors 䊊

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

WRS0802

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0674

Rear-facing – step 5
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

6. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 5.

WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
WRS0256

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.

1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS0669

Rear-facing – step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0670

Rear-facing – step 4
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.

WRS0763

Rear-facing – step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.

LRS0824

(if so equipped)

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1 , pull the
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap 䊊
2 .
flap down to allow access to the anchors 䊊

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.

WRS0799

Forward-facing web-mounted – step 3

WRS0800

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 7.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 5
5. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

WRS0697

Forward-facing – step 7
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.

the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.

WRS0699

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
section for head restraint adjustment, removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 3
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 5
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 6
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 8
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

WRS0475

Forward-facing – step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
should illuminate. If this
status light
light is not illuminated see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint installation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
To remove or reinstall the tether anchor covers,
see “Upper tether anchor/key cylinder covers” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
LRS0798

INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
1 from the anchor
1. Flip up the anchor cover 䊊
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
2 .
the seatback 䊊
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
3 .
point on the rear parcel shelf 䊊

LRS0455

WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured in a
sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
1 is chosen, the
low back booster seat 䊊
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
2 should be used.
high back booster seat 䊊

LRS0453

LRS0464

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
● Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.

● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
WRS0699

LRS0454

1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

Front passenger position
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If
the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints” in this section for head restraint adjustment, removal
and installation information.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster seat.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning
the following systems:

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.

● Driver and passenger supplemental frontimpact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
WRS0475

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
may or may not illuminate,
status light
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.

● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag
● Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supplemental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.

WRS0031

WARNING
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
● The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

● The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an accident. See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.

ARS1133

● Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

ARS1041

WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ARS1042

ARS1043

ARS1044

ARS1045

ARS1046

WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.
● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for
details.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

WARNING

SSS0101

WARNING

● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
● The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0032

WARNING
● When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.

SSS0159

SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

LRS2025

Coupe

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
5. Side-impact air bag pressure sensor
(driver’s side shown; passenger’s side
similar)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
7. Crash zone sensor
8. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s
and passenger’s side
9. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor)
10. Occupant classification system control
unit
11. Seat belt with pretensioner
12. Side satellite sensor

LRS2024

Sedan

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage air bag inflators. It also monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag
Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and
the occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of
a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classification
sensor is also monitored. Based on information
from the sensors, only one front air bag may
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned OFF under
some conditions, depending on the information
provided by the occupant classification sensor. If
the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger
air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is
unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but
the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this section for
further details. One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.

If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.

The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.

Status light
is
The front passenger air bag status light
located on the instrument panel above the radio
controls. The light operates as follows:
is
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
illuminates to indicate
section: The
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
WRS0475

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions outlined in this
is OFF to indicate
section: The light
that the front passenger air bag is operational.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.
The occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is
designed to detect an occupant and objects on
the seat. For example, if a child is in the front
passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is
designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is
on the seat, the occupant classification sensor
can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an
edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of
position), this could cause the sensor to turn the
air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental
air bag.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor is designed to operate as
described above to turn the front passenger air
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
child restraints and to use the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a
crash instead of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.

The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat
becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will
remain off.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
, located in the meter and gauges area
light
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions

WARNING
● Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.

● Do not place objects with sharp edges
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy
objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such
objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor). This can affect the operation of the
air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.

● Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.

● Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.

● Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classification sensor.

● Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.

● Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
● A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.

WRS0816

Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roofmounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. These systems
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may

When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side
air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the occupants.
Because of this, the force of the side air bag and
curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,
these air bag modules during inflation. The side
air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly
after the collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING
● Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
● Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.

● Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag system should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts with pretensioners (Front
seats)
WARNING
● The pretensioners cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
● No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
● Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

The pretensioner system activates in conjunction
with the front air bag system. Working with the
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.

The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner system, the supplemental air bag warning
will not come on, will flash intermitlight
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition switch has been placed in the
ON or START position. In this case, the pretensioner system may not function properly. It must
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WRS0895

SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located
on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental frontimpact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.

When the ignition is placed in the ON position,
the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates
for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This
means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
LRS0100

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
in the instrument panel, monidisplaying
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, side-impact air bag pressure sensors, occupant classification system, front air bag
modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag
modules, pretensioners and all related wiring.

● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems
may not operate properly. They must be checked
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental
air bag systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK
position when working under the hood or inside
the vehicle.

WARNING
● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the front air bags inflate, the activated
pretensioners must also be replaced.
The air bag module and pretensioners
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pretensioners
cannot be repaired.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
● If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioners or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Vehicle information display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
How to use the Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . 2-17
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-32
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Heated seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Storage pouch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Storage box (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Cargo net (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Personal Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
HomeLink姞 universal transceiver (if so equipped). . . . . 2-51

Programming HomeLink姞. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Programming HomeLink姞 for Canadian
customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Operating the HomeLink姞 universal
transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Rolling code programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button . . . . . . 2-54
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

INSTRUMENT PANEL
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
WIC1598

1.
2.

Vents (P. 4-18)
Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-29)

2-2 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetooth姞 Hands-free
Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-95, P. 4-91, P. 4-106)
Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

17.
18.

19.

Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-41, P. 2-35)
Cruise control main/set switch
(P. 5-20)
Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-34)
Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-51)
Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-41)
Glove box (P. 2-41)
Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
Covered storage box (P. 2-42)
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(P. 4-26)
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(P. 4-19)
Shift selector (P. 5-11)
Audio system controls (if so equipped)/
Storage (if so equipped) (P. 4-29,
P.2-42)
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-28)

METERS AND GAUGES
20.
21.
22.

Vehicle information display controls
(P. 2-17)
Hood release (P. 3-23)
Trunk opener (P. 3-23)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-36)
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WIC1259

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Tachometer
Speedometer
Fuel gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Odometer/twin trip odometer
Twin trip odometer change button

7.
8.

Vehicle information display
Instrument brightness control

Instruments and controls 2-3

Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.

WIC1418

1.
2.
3.

Speedometer
Change button
Odometer/twin trip odometer

WIC1261

Changing the display:
Pushing the change button changes the display
as follows:

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
1 indicates vehicle speed in
The speedometer 䊊
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).

2-4 Instruments and controls

Trip

→ Trip

Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the change button for more than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer
to zero.

CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.
LIC1058

TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
1 .
the red zone 䊊

CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.

LIC1386

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the
1 when the gauge needle points
normal range 䊊
within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.

Instruments and controls 2-5

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
indicates that the fuel-filler door is
The
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
light should turn off. If the
the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
LIC1060

FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers E (Empty).

2-6 Instruments and controls

● For additional information, see “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and indicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posibutton as described in the
tion, press the
chart below to activate various features of the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Push and hold
the
button for about:
1 second
5 seconds
9 seconds

Feature:
(Push button again for about 1 second to change settings)
Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glare
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The compass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop
button and the display will
pressing the
show compass direction within a few seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

button when the ignition switch
Press the
is placed in the ON position. The direction will be
displayed.

Zone variation change procedure

LIC1487

Press the
button for about 1 second when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to
1 on or off. The
toggle the compass display 䊊
display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

The difference between magnetic north and geographical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Establish your location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration. Record your zone
number.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
button in for 5 seconds until
3. Press the
the current zone entry number is displayed.
button repeatedly until the
4. Press the
desired zone entry number is displayed.

Instruments and controls 2-7

● If a magnet is located near the compass or the vehicle is driven where the
terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the
compass display may not indicate the
correct direction.
● In places where the terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the correction of the
direction starts automatically.
Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
switch for about 9 seconds. The
the
display will read “C.”
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles the display
should return to normal.
● If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjustment,
have the compass checked at an authorized
NISSAN dealer.
WIC0355

2-8 Instruments and controls

● The compass may not indicate the correct
compass point in tunnels or while driving up
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns
to the correct compass point when the vehicle moves to an area where the geomagnetism is stabilized.)

CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the operation of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-9

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Brake warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light

Security indicator light

Charge warning light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light (if so equipped)

Slip indicator light

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
check warning light (if so equipped)

Cruise main switch indicator light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light

Cruise set switch indicator light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator
light

Low tire pressure warning light

Front passenger air bag status light

Master warning light

High beam indicator light (blue)

CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
,

2-10 Instruments and controls

The following lights come on briefly and then go
off:
or

If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.

WARNING LIGHTS
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
⬙Brake system⬙ in the ⬙Starting and driving⬙ section.

Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

WARNING
● Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
● Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid
MINIMUM or MIN
fluid reservoir, do
brake system has
NISSAN dealer.

level is below the
mark on the brake
not drive until the
been checked at a

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driving and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)

Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.

Instruments and controls 2-11

CAUTION
● Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely. Refer to “Variable
voltage control system” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section later
in this manual.
● Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.

Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) check
warning light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.
If the light comes on at any other time, it may
indicate the CVT system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,

2-12 Instruments and controls

pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.

CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.

Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active
as long as the low tire pressure warning light
remains illuminated.
For additional information, see “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and
in the “In case of emergency” section.

TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

WARNING
● If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still illuminates while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION
● The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
● Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle information display warnings appear.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.

Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.

2-14 Instruments and controls

If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner systems need servicing and your vehicle
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
● The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
● The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
● The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional details, see “Supplemental restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.

WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indicators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.

Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift selector position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicator
light
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator
light
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light (
)
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
light should
After a few driving trips, the
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.

Operation
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if
the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the vehicle information display. If the fuelfiller cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
light should turn off after a few
The
driving trips. If the
light does not turn
off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.

Instruments and controls 2-15

The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, see “Security systems” later in this section.

Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or
the traction control system is operating, thus
alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction
limits. The road surface may be slippery.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has
been turned off.
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
again or restart the engine and the system will be
reactivated. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you push the push-button ignition switch to
the ON position. The light will turn off after about
2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light
indistays on or comes on along with the
cator light while you are driving, have the Vehicle
Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK
position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelligent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the
Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section.

WIC1102
1 is located on
The vehicle information display 䊊
the bottom of the speedometer. It displays such
items as:

● Intelligent Key operation information
● some indicators and warnings
● other information
For details about the Intelligent Key, see
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.

LIC1103

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Press the
button, located on the instrument panel just behind the steering wheel, to
display the following modes:
MPG→ MPG/MPH → Time/Miles → Range →
Exterior Temperature → Setting → Warning

Instruments and controls 2-17

LIC1093

LIC1097

WIC1266

Fuel economy mode

Average speed mode

Time/Miles (km) mode

The fuel economy mode can be selected to display the instant fuel economy since the last reset.

The average speed mode can be selected to
display the average miles per gallon and miles per
hour since the last reset.

The time/miles (km) mode can be selected to
show the time and distance driven since the last
reset.

2-18 Instruments and controls

LIC1095

LIC1096

LIC1541

Range mode

Exterior temperature mode

Setting mode

The range mode can be selected to give you an
estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is constantly calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
and the actual fuel consumption.

The exterior temperature mode can be selected
to provide you with the temperature outside of
your vehicle.

The setting mode allows you to set reminders or
preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals or
language displays.
In the setting mode screen press
to:

to move

● Alert
● Maintenance
● Options
and press

to select the menu.

Instruments and controls 2-19

LIC1544

LIC1046

LIC1545

Alert mode

Reset mode

Maintenance mode

The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying
you of time to rest or icy conditions.

The reset mode can be selected in any screen
that allows for preferences to be programmed.
Once the screen is selected, you have the option
to reset the selected distances or time to a new
setting.

The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts
for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the
following:

The time to rest alert lets you know when you
have been traveling for a long time and may need
a break.
The icy alert notifies you that icy driving conditions may exist.

● tires
● oil
● filter
● other
to highSet a desired interval by pushing
light the maintenance field and pressing
.
The reset mode will open up and allow you to
enter the desired distance.

2-20 Instruments and controls

For additional information, see “Indicators for
maintenance” later in this section.

LIC1546

LIC1098

Options mode

Warning mode

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and
.
pressing

The warning mode can be selected to view any
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is
selected you have the option of skipping the
warning or viewing it in detail.

Language: English or French
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, l/km
You can select the language and unit using
button and pressing
.
the

Warnings can be present for issues such as an
open door or low fuel. For more information about
potential warnings see “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” later in this section.

The settings are automatically saved when you
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
any other mode button.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Indicators for maintenance
1. Engine oil replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for changing the engine
oil. You can set or reset the distance for
changing the engine oil. See “Maintenance
mode” earlier in this section.
2. Oil filter replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for replacing the oil filter.
You can set or reset the distance for replacing the oil filter. See “Maintenance mode”
earlier in this section.
3. Tire replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for replacing tires. You
can set or reset the distance for replacing
tires. See “Maintenance mode” earlier in this
section.

WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. See “Changing
Wheels and Tires” in “Maintenance & DoIt-Yourself” section. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits
LIC2027

2-22 Instruments and controls

and road conditions affect tire wear and
when tires should be replaced. Setting the
tire replacement indicator for a certain
driving distance does not mean your tires
will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always
perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire
pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or death.
4. “OTHER” indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the engine
oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance
items can include such things as air filter or
tire rotation. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items.
See “Maintenance mode” earlier in this section. For scheduled maintenance items and
intervals, see your “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide.”

LIC2007

Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators

4. Low windshield-washer fluid warning
5. No key warning

1. Door and trunk open warning

6. Parking brake warning

2. Push warning (CVT models)

7. Shift P warning (CVT models)

3. Low fuel warning

8. Engine start operation indicator
(CVT models)
9. Engine start operation indicator
(M/T models)
10. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator

Instruments and controls 2-23

11. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

12. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge
indicator

14. Check tire pressure warning

This warning illuminates when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshieldwasher fluid as necessary. See “Windshieldwasher fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

Door and trunk open warning

No key warning

This warning illuminates when the parking brake
is set and the vehicle is driven.

This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk
has been opened when the engine is running.

This warning illuminates following two conditions:

SHIFT P warning (CVT models)

13. Loose fuel cap warning

Push warning (CVT models)
After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Push
warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC position when the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position.
See “Shift P warning (CVT models)” in this section for additional information.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition
switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK
position.
Low fuel warning
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

2-24 Instruments and controls

1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the
system. If this warning illuminates, you cannot start the engine.
Check for the following causes and perform
the assigned remedies:
– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried
with you is discharged completely. Replace the battery with a new one.
– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not
registered to the system. Use the registered Intelligent Key.
– You do not have an Intelligent Key with
you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.

2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent
Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
A chime will also sound.
Parking brake warning

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selector in any position except in the P (Park) position.
If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position or place the ignition
switch in the ON position.
An inside warning chime will also sound.
If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)
position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to
“Push warning (CVT models)” in this section.
For additional information about Intelligent Key,
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Predriving checks and adjustments” section.

Engine start operation indicator (CVT
models)

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator

This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position.

This indicator illuminates when the driver’s door
is opened with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the
Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also
sounds.

This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal depressed.
Engine start operation indicator (M/T
models)
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position
with the shift selector in neutral and the parking
brake on.

If this indicator illuminates, remove the Intelligent
Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with
you when leaving the vehicle.

This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See “Low
tire pressure warning light” earlier in this section
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “Starting and driving” section.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge indicator
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.

This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and
the brake pedal depressed.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
with a new one. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator

Loose fuel cap warning

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.
(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.)

Check tire pressure warning

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
refueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.

If this indicator illuminates, insert the Intelligent
Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct
direction. See “Push-button ignition switch” in
the “Starting and driving” section.

Instruments and controls 2-25

SECURITY SYSTEMS
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
LIC0301

Your vehicle may have two types of security systems:
● Vehicle security system
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

2-26 Instruments and controls

How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with the
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch
(if so equipped), power door lock switch or
mechanical key.
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-

onds the vehicle security system automatically shifts into the armed phase. The
security light begins to flash once every 3
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the system will not arm.
● Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
trunk lid locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position, the system will be
released.

Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
● The alarm automatically turns off after approximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or
button on the Intelliby pressing the
gent Key.

The alarm is activated by:
● opening the door or trunk lid without using
the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock
switch).

How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing
button on the Intelligent Key, or pressthe
ing the request switch (if so equipped) on the
driver’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent
Key in range of the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT.

LIC0474

Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.

Instruments and controls 2-27

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
2
䊊
3
䊊

Low — continuous low speed operation
High — continuous high speed operation

4 to have one sweep operaPush the lever up 䊊
tion of the wiper.

5 to operate the
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

LIC1061

SWITCH OPERATION

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

The windshield wiper and washer switch operates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.

● Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:

● Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.

1
䊊

Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
A
adjusted by turning the switch toward 䊊
B (Faster). Also, for vehicles
(Slower) or 䊊
equipped with speed dependent wipers, the
intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)

2-28 Instruments and controls

● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

● Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the washer fluid concentrate and
water.

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so
equipped)
WARNING

ᏘHIGH

VOLTAGE

● When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer.
LIC2030

Type A
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

WIC1460

Type B
NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio system.

● Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional headlights. If they are not correctly aimed,
they might temporarily blind an oncoming driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the
color and brightness will soon stabilize.

When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

Instruments and controls 2-29

● The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off operation. It is generally desirable not to turn
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime
running lights are active (Canada only),
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
This way the life of the xenon headlights is not reduced.
● If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drastically decrease, the light will start blinking, or the color of the light will become reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.

2-30 Instruments and controls

LIC1085

Type A

LIC1064

Type B

To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi1 .
tion 䊊
2. Push the push-button ignition switch to the
ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another
door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5
minute timer is reset.
LIC1063

Type C

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1
䊊
2
䊊

When turning the switch to the
position, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
When turning the switch to the
position, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.

CAUTION

LIC1086

Autolight system (if so equipped)

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
, or
position.
the OFF,

The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.

Use the headlights with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Instruments and controls 2-31

CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)

LIC1068

Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located on the top side
of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered,
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark
out and the headlights will illuminate. If
this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could become discharged.

LIC1087

Headlight beam select
1
䊊

䊊
3
䊊
2

To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
light illuminates.
and the
Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or
position, the headlights will turn off after
5 minutes.

2-32 Instruments and controls

The headlights automatically illuminate at a reduced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
position. Turn the
OFF position or in the
position for full
headlight switch to the
illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC1066

LIC1088

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

The instrument cluster illuminates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

1
䊊

The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in the
or
position.
AUTO,
Turn the control left or right to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights when driving
at night.

Turn signal
Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal
2
䊊

To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

Instruments and controls 2-33

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.

LIC1089

LIC0394

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the
position, then turn the fog light
switch to the
position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
position.
the
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.

2-34 Instruments and controls

WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

HORN

HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)

CAUTION
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
LIC1069

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.

WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.

LIC1543

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the low or high position of the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature.
The indicator light in the switch will illuminate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
● If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.

Instruments and controls 2-35

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH

POWER OUTLET
● Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
● Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
● Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
LIC1070

LIC1548

The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
indicator will come on.
switch. The
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and
driving” section.

2-36 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The
console outlet is powered directly by the vehicle’s battery.

CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.

● Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquids to contact the outlet.

STORAGE

WIC1262

Console box
Open the lower half of the console box to access
the power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in this
section.

LIC1073

MAP POCKETS

LIC0016

SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
can be used to store maps.

Instruments and controls 2-37

CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.

LIC1242

WIC1551

STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

A storage pouch is located on the front of the
driver’s and passenger’s seats.

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING
Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects
or objects that cannot fully fit inside the
pouch because they might increase the
likelihood of an injury in a crash.

2-38 Instruments and controls

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.

LIC1075

Front - Type A

LIC1105

Front - Type B

WRS0167

Rear (sedan)

Instruments and controls 2-39

CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.

LIC1219

Rear (coupe)

CUP HOLDERS
To open the front cup holders, push the cup
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and
push down until it clicks in place.
The plastic insert (if so equipped) may be removed to accommodate a larger cup size or for
cleaning.
The rear center cup holders are located in the
rear fold-down armrest (sedan) or in the rear arm
rest (coupe).

2-40 Instruments and controls

WIC1216

Soft bottle holder

Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
● Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.

WIC1076

WIC1120

WIC1121

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE BOX

Lower half

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the
1 or unlocking 䊊
2 the
master key when locking 䊊
glove box.

Upper half

Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the
lower half of the console box. A power outlet is
located inside the console box. The mat (if so
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.

WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box. The mat (if so
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.
The upper half of the console box may be used for
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
provided at the front of the upper half of the
console box for phone cord routing to the power
outlet.

Instruments and controls 2-41

LIC1477

STORAGE BOX (if so equipped)

LIC1597

LIC0748

COVERED STORAGE BOX

GROCERY HOOKS

Push the center of the lid to open.

The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.

CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

2-42 Instruments and controls

WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
● Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.

WIC1264

CARGO NET (if so equipped)
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.

LIC0802

To install the cargo net, attach the net to the
retainers.
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the
cargo net retainers.

● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended children could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.

The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.

Instruments and controls 2-43

Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold down until the desired window
position is reached.

WIC1124

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Window lock button
Power door lock switch
Front passenger side (automatic switch,
if so equipped)
Right rear passenger side (sedan only)
Left rear passenger side (sedan only)
Driver side automatic switch

2-44 Instruments and controls

WIC1265

Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch to the first detent
and continue to hold it down until the desired
1 . To close the
window position is reached 䊊
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold it up until the desired window
2 .
position is reached 䊊

Auto-reverse function
If the control unit detects something caught in the
window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position or for 45 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.

LIC0718

Rear power window switch (sedan
only)
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
1 . To
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
2 .
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.

LIC0410

Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down (only
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and
release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window,
lift the switch up while the window is opening.

Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.

Instruments and controls 2-45

MOONROOF (if so equipped)
When power window switch does not
operate

To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
2 .
toward
䊊

If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window
system:

To open or close the moonroof part way, push the
switch in any direction while the moonroof is
sliding to stop it in the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

Close the moonroof by pushing the switch
2 . Release the switch, then push
toward
䊊
2 again to tilt the
the switch toward
䊊
moonroof up.

2. Open the window more than halfway by
operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete. The
power window automatically opens or
closes depending on if the automatic down
or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other
windows.
If the power window function does not operate
properly after performing the above procedure,
see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

WIC1559

AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The automatic moonroof is operational for about 45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the
front passenger’s door is opened during this
period of about 45 seconds, power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch
1 .
toward
䊊

2-46 Instruments and controls

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch
1 .
toward
䊊

WARNING
● In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.

CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.

Resetting the moonroof switch
The moonroof switch may not operate properly
and need to be reset if any of the following
conditions have occurred:
● the moonroof has been manually moved,
● the moonroof motor has been removed and
reinstalled after the moonroof has been repositioned or adjusted,
● the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted
or changed, or
● the electrical supply interrupted and/or
some malfunction has been detected.
Use the following reset procedure to return the
moonroof operation to normal.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch
2 . Once the moonroof has
toward
䊊
reached the full tilt position, release the
switch. Push and hold the switch toward

2 position again. After a delay of
the
䊊
four seconds, the moonroof will make a small
movement and backup.

3. Release the switch.
4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch,
push and continuously hold the switch
2 . The moonroof will move
toward
䊊
from the tilt position to the open position and
back to the close position.

Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.

WARNING

NOTE:

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

If the switch is released at any time during
Step 4, the procedure must be restarted.

When closing:

5. Release the switch. Do not place the ignition
switch in the OFF position for at least 2
seconds. The moonroof is now reset.
If the moonroof still does not operate properly,
have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.

If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
When tilting down:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.

Instruments and controls 2-47

CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
● Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.

2-48 Instruments and controls

WIC1550

Type A

WIC1267

Type B

INTERIOR LIGHT
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
1 ,
● When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
the interior light illuminates, regardless of
door position. The light will go off after 15
minutes unless the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.

● When the switch is in the center DOOR
2 , the front and rear personal
position 䊊
lights will illuminate when the driver’s door is
opened. Lights remain on for a maximum of
30 seconds after driver’s door is closed.

NOTE:
The doorstep lights illuminate when the
driver and passenger doors are opened regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically
after 15 minutes while doors are open to
prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

The lights will go off when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is
closed and locked.
The lights will also go off after 15 minutes when
the doors are open.
3 ,
● When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
the interior light does not illuminate, regardless of door position.

Instruments and controls 2-49

PERSONAL LIGHTS

WIC1476

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
The console light will turn on whenever the parking lights or headlights are illuminated.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the instrument brightness control.

MAP LIGHTS

LIC1083

WIC1494

Rear personal lights (sedan only)

Front map lights

To turn the rear personal lights on, press the
switch. To turn them off, press the switch again.

To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. To
turn them off, press the lens again.

CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.

2-50 Instruments and controls

TRUNK LIGHT

HOMELINK姞 UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.

The light will go off after about 15 minutes if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exterior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver:
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehicle’s battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink姞 will retain all programming.
Once the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information, refer to “Programming HomeLink姞” later in this section.

WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLink姞 Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
● During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLink姞
Universal Transceiver.

Instruments and controls 2-51

grammed device, press and hold the programmed HomeLink姞 button — releasing
when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink姞 blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLink姞 has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train the
HomeLink姞 to complete the programming
which may require a ladder and another person for convenience.

WIC0986

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK姞
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
HomeLink姞 buttons (to clear the memory)
1 blinks (after 20
until the indicator light 䊊
seconds). Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink姞 surface.

2-52 Instruments and controls

WIC0987

3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold both the HomeLink姞 button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter button.
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on the HomeLink姞 flashes, changing
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapidly flashing light indicates successful programming.
To activate the garage door or other pro-

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” program button located on the garage door
opener’s motor to activate the “training
mode”. This button is usually located near
the antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under a
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button.
NOTE:
Once you have pressed and released the
program button on the garage door opener’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
Use the help of a second person for convenience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the garage door opener’s program button, quickly and firmly press and release the
HomeLink姞 button you’ve just programmed.
Press and release the HomeLink姞 button up
to 3 times to complete the training.
8. Your HomeLink姞 button should now be programmed. (To program the remaining
HomeLink姞 buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
“clear”
all
previously
programmed
HomeLink姞 buttons.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink姞 buttons, refer to
the HomeLink姞 web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK姞 FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required handheld transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 seconds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
HomeLink姞, continue to press and hold the
HomeLink姞 button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Programming HomeLink姞”) while you press and repress (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every

2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
(indicating successful programming).

● press and hold both the HomeLink姞 and
hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

NOTE:

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink姞 surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLink姞 is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.

When programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener
components.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK姞
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver (once programmed) may now be used to activate the garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the appropriate programmed HomeLink姞 Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLEDIAGNOSIS

If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

If the HomeLink姞 does not quickly learn the handheld transmitter information:
● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
● position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLink姞 surface.

Instruments and controls 2-53

ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING
Rolling code garage door openers (or other rolling code devices) which are “code protected”
and manufactured after 1996, may be determined by the following:
● Reference the garage door opener Owner’s
Manual for verification.
● The hand-held transmitter appears to program the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver
but does not activate the garage door.
● Press and hold the trained HomeLink姞 button. If the garage door opener has the rolling
code feature, the HomeLink姞 indicator light
will flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 seconds.
To program the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver
to a garage door opener with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after completing
the “Programming HomeLink姞” (the aid of a second person may make the following procedures
quicker and easier).
1. Locate the training button on the garage
door opener motor unit. Exact location and
color of the button may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty locating
the training button, reference the garage
door opener Owner’s Manual.

2-54 Instruments and controls

2. Press the training button on the garage door
opener motor unit (which may activate a
training light).
NOTE:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in
which to initiate step 3.
3. Firmly press and release the programmed
HomeLink姞 button a second time to complete the training process. (Some garage
door openers may require you to do this
procedure a third time to complete the training.)
The garage door opener should now recognize
the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver and activate when the HomeLink姞 button is pressed. The
remaining two buttons may now be programmed
(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4
in the “Programming HomeLink姞” procedures
earlier in this section).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK姞 BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink姞 button. Do not release the button until step 4
has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76
mm) away from the HomeLink姞 surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.
4. The HomeLink姞 indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.
The HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLink姞 button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLink姞
buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink姞. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.

FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D. CV2V67690

Instruments and controls 2-55

MEMO

2-56 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Child safety rear door lock (Sedan only) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ With Door and Trunk
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Without Door and Trunk
Request Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

How to use the remote keyless entry
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Tilt operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Telescopic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

KEYS
use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the
registration process requires erasing all memory
in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys
that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
WPD0363

1.
2.
3.

Two Intelligent Keys
Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
Keys)
Key number plate

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Key which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelligent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys
must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.

per tether anchor/key cylinder covers” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.
SPA1951

Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below:
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF
position.
2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with
the mechanical key.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors, trunk lid, glove box and rear seatback lock.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.

See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” section,
“Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section, and “Up-

See “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the
“Instruments and controls” section and “Seats” in
the “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can duplicate your existing key. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key
codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

Opening and closing windows (if so
equipped)
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with automatic operation at the same time.

WARNING
● Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
● Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
WPD0444

Driver’s side

LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
1 of the vehicle
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
locks all doors.
2 of the
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
3 (where the key can
returning the key to neutral 䊊
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
4 .
all doors 䊊

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the Intelligent Key in the port and
any door open, all doors will lock and unlock
automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the
vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any
door open, all doors will unlock automatically and
a chime will sound after the door is closed.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
WPD0291

Inside lock

WPD0381

Door lock switch

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH

To lock the door without the key, move the inside
1 , then close the
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
door.

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
1 . When locking the door this
the lock position 䊊
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.

To unlock the door without the key, move the
2 .
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
2 .
side) to the unlock position 䊊

● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
● All doors unlock automatically when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The automatic unlock function can be deactivated or activated. To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
position (UNLOCK) for more than
the
5 seconds.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ WITH
DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST
SWITCHES
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.

WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before
use.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the
power door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side).
LIC0716

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
(Sedan only)
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
1 , the
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
2 ,
When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊
the door can be opened only from the outside.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function or pushing
the request switch on the vehicle without taking
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating
environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key.

CAUTION
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key under the following
operating conditions:
● When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
● When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
● When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port to start the engine. Replace the
discharged battery with a new one as soon as
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ignition switch” in the “Starting and driving” section.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
1 .
from each request switch 䊊
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

WPD0465

Coupe shown Sedan similar

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
1 .
operating range from the request switch 䊊

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.

WPD0432

WPD0375

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
● Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of operation.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

CAUTION
● After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handle or the trunk opener
switch.
● When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
WPD0433

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

Locking doors
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position, place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
1
3. Push any door handle request switch 䊊
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WPD0369

NOTE:
● Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
● Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the mechanical key even if any door is open.
● Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.

● The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.

NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.

CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.

WPD0432

Coupe shown, Sedan similar

Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
1 .
2. Push the door handle request switch 䊊

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.

3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.

1
4. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.

WPD0369

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch.
● Opening any door.
● Pushing the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting
for 30 seconds by performing one of the following operations.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.

The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
LPD0478

Opening the trunk lid
A for
1. Push the trunk opener request switch 䊊
more than 1 second while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4
times.

The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
● When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
● When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.

CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.

WPD0359

Locking doors

WPD0360

Unlocking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

1. Press the
Key.

2. Close all doors.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

button on the Intelligent

button again within 5 sec3. Press the
onds to unlock all doors.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
button:
minute after pressing the

3. Press the
Key.

5. All doors will be locked.

● Opening any doors.
● Pushing the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15
seconds by performing one of the following operations:
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.

Opening windows (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation simultaneously.
but● To open the windows, press the
ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
button on the Intelligent Key.
the
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WPD0364

WPD0361

Releasing the trunk lid

Using the panic alarm

Press the
button for longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel
switch” in this section.

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
button on the
by pressing and holding the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for 25 seconds, or
● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
● Pushing the request switch on the driver or
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
WPD0362

Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom
The SHIFT P warning appears on the disWhen pushing the ignition switch to stop
play and the inside warning chime sounds
the engine
continuously.
When opening the driver’s door to get out
of the vehicle

When closing the door after getting out of
the vehicle

When closing the door with the inside lock
knob placed in the LOCK position

When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door

When closing the trunk lid

The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times
and the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
The NO KEY warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The shift “P” warning light appears on the
display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

Possible Cause
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC
position.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key
port.
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.

The ignition switch is placed in the ACC
position and the shift selector is not in the P
(Park) position.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and the shift selector is not in the P
(Park) position.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
trunk.
The outside chime sounds for approximately A door is not closed securely.
2 seconds.
The door handle request switch is pushed
before the door is closed.
The outside chime sounds for approximately The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Remedy
Shift the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close the door securely.
Push the door handle request switch after
the door is closed.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK
REQUEST SWITCHES
WARNING
● Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
● The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves
when the buttons are pressed. The FAA
advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key
while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally
when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key.

CAUTION
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key under the following
operating conditions:
● When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
● When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
● When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.
● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.

Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelligent Key port to start the engine. Replace the
discharged battery with a new one as soon as
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ignition switch” in the “Starting and driving” section.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a battery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of the
vehicle.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.

CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.

WPD0359

Locking doors

WPD0360

Unlocking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

1. Press the
Key.

2. Close all doors.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

button on the Intelligent

button again within 5 sec3. Press the
onds to unlock all doors.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
button:
minute after pressing the

3. Press the
Key.

5. All doors will be locked.

● Opening any doors.
● Pushing the ignition switch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

WPD0361

Releasing the trunk lid

Using the panic alarm

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and
buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds
continuously.

When pushing the ignition switch to stop
the engine

When opening the driver’s door to get out
of the vehicle

When closing the door after getting out of
the vehicle

When closing the door with the inside lock
knob turned to LOCK
When closing the trunk lid

The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times
and the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
The NO KEY warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
The outside chime sounds for approximately
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Possible Cause

Remedy
Shift the shift selector to the P position.

The shift selector is not in the P position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key
port.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position
and the shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
trunk.
The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.

Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

HOOD

TRUNK LID

WPD0441
1
䊊

䊊
2

3
䊊
4
䊊

Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel; the
hood springs up slightly.
Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your
fingertips and raise the hood.
Remove the support rod from the clamp.
Insert the support rod into the hole on the
5
passenger’s side of the hood. 䊊

WARNING
● Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.

LPD0394

OPENER OPERATION
WARNING
● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.

When closing the hood, return the hood rod to its
original position. Lower the hood approximately
12 inches (30 cm) above the latch and release it.
This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch
down.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
LPD0395

NOTE:
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelligent Key. Refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
Key™” in this section.

Cancel switch
When the switch, located inside the glove box, is
in the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid will
be cancelled. The trunk can only be opened with
the master key or keyfob.
The trunk lid cannot be opened when:
● using the trunk lid release switch,
● the trunk open request switch (if so
equipped) is pushed, when the Intelligent
Key is in range of the vehicle or
● the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is
pressed.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0396

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illuminated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.

FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.

The handle is located inside the trunk compartment on the interior of the trunk lid.

LPD0397

OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor
to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuelfiller door, pull up the release. To lock, close the
fuel-filler door securely.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
● Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to come on.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

● Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are filling it.
– Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION
● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. Failure to tighten the fuelfiller cap properly after the LOOSE
FUEL CAP warning appears may cause
Malfunction Indicator Light
the
(MIL) to illuminate.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Malproperly may cause the
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumilight illuminates benate. If the
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue
to
drive
the
vehicle.
light should turn off after a
The
few driving trips. If the
light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
● For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.

LPD0448

Coupe
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
remove.
1
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuelfiller tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until it
clicks. The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.

A on the innext button 䊊
3. Press the
strument panel located behind the steering
wheel for about 1 second to turn off the
B after tightLOOSE FUEL CAP warning 䊊
ening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD0449

Sedan

LRS2006

Loose Fuel Cap warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the
vehicle information display when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
been refueled. To turn off the warning, do the
following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon
as possible. See “Fuel-filler cap”.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING

SUN VISORS
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
1 all the way toward you and
Pull the lever 䊊
adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in
3 , to the desired position. Lock the
direction 䊊
wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the
lever has returned to its original position.

WARNING

LPD0398

TILT OPERATION
1 all the way toward you and
Pull the lever 䊊
2 to the
adjust the steering wheel up or down 䊊
desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the
lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its
original position.

Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driver’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
WPD0435

WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.

1
䊊
2
䊊

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Coupe shown, sedan similar
To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
sun visor to the side.

MIRRORS
3
䊊

Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)
in or out as needed.

CAUTION
Do not store the sun visor before returning
the extension to its original position.

LPD0400

Coupe shown, sedan similar

VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.

WPD0126

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
1 reduces glare from the
The night position 䊊
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
2 when driving in daylight
Use the day position 䊊
hours.

WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
䊊
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation.

LPD0469

Type A-Without compass

Type A and Type B
2 will illuminate when the
The indicator light 䊊
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
● the O button for inside mirrors without
compass.
button for inside mirrors with
● the
compass.
The indicator light will turn off.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

LPD0470

Type B-With compass
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
press:
● the | button for inside mirrors without
compass.
button for inside mirrors with
● the
compass.
The indicator light will turn on.
For information on HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver operation, see the “HomeLink姞 Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
LPD0346

Electric control type
The outside mirror remote control only operates
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.

WPD0056

Manual folding outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Rotate the control lever to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by
moving the control lever.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Difference between predicted and actual
distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Audio system (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Operation (models with Navigation System) . . . . . . 4-63
USB interface (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
USB interface (models with Navigation
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
iPod姞* player operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
iPod姞* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Music Box姞 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Bluetooth姞 streaming audio (if so equipped) . . . . . . 4-84
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98
Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-102
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-104
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105
Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-106
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108

Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-110
Handset phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-112
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-113
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115
Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-116
Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-118
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate
Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-135
Speaker Adaptation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-138
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-140

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.

LHA1400

1. Display screen

5. INFO button (P. 4-5)

2. MAP button*

6. SETTING button (P. 4-6)

3. DEST button*

7. Volume control knob

4. ROUTE button*

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

(brightness control) button

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.

● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.

Reference symbols:

To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.

The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH
SCREEN
CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mercury. Doing so could result in an injury.
In case of contact with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then operate the navigation system.

WARNING
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.

LHA1227

Touch screen operation
Selecting the item:
Touch an item to select. To select the “Naviga1 on the
tion” key, touch the “Navigation” key 䊊
2 to return to the
screen. Touch the “BACK” key 䊊
previous screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

● Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
● OK:
Completes the character input.

Touch screen maintenance

LHA1228

LHA1230

Adjusting the item:

Inputting characters:

1 or the “⫺” key 䊊
2 to adjust
Touch the “+” key 䊊
the settings of an item.

1 .
Touch the letter or number key 䊊

3 to scroll up the page one
Touch the up arrow 䊊
4 to
item at a time, or touch the double up arrow 䊊
scroll up an entire page.

Touch the down arrow 䊊 to scroll down the
page one item at a time, or touch the double
6 to scroll down an entire page.
down arrow 䊊
5

There are some options available when inputting
characters.
● Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
● Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
● Space:
Inserts a space.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the
screen.

2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illumination, etc.).
3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:
Shows that the arrows on the touch screen
may be used to move up or down on the
screen and select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections available for the current menu, even if they are on
multiple pages (for example, 1/7).
WHA1401

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center display screen in menus. Whenever a menu selection is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Comfort” key).

5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently highlighted (for example, Cabin lighting when
unlocking doors).

LHA1402

HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows
vehicle and navigation information for your convenience.

Where am I?
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Traffic Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Weather Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Map Update
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

Navigation Version
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding this item.

GPS Position
For GPS Position, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Voice Recognition settings
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.

LHA1236

HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Settings screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1237

WHA1502

WHA1503

LHA1242

Display settings

Brightness/contrast:

Display off:

Select the “Display” key. On the screen above,
select the “Display Adjustment” key. The Display
Adjustment screen will appear.

Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
background. Touch the “+” or “-” key to adjust the
brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast
to lower or higher.

Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the
“Display ON” turns off and the message above
will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC
(Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button
on the control panel is operated, the display turns
on for that operation. If one of the control panel
buttons is pressed, the display will not automatically turn off until that operation is finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5
seconds.

The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by selecting the
“Back” key or any other mode button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

To turn the screen on:
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key, or
button and the message
● Press the
“resuming display” will appear and the “Display ON” key will be automatically turned on
(no amber indicator).
Background color:
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by selecting the
“Back” key or any other mode button.

LHA1240

LHA1241

Color theme:

Clock

Select the “Display” key, then select the “Color
Theme” key. The Color Theme select screen will
appear.

The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key.

Select the key for the desired color. The appearance of the background, arrows and bars will
change for all screens accordingly. You can
choose a black, blue or red color theme.

On-screen Clock:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Format (24h):

● Newfoundland

When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), the clock format will change from the
default 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.

● Hawaii
● Alaska
After selection/settings, select the “Back” key or
any other mode button to accept the changes.

Offset (hour):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
hours.
Offset (minute):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
minutes.
Daylight Savings Time:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illuminated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will go out.

LHA1243

Time Zone:
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.
Select one of the following zones, depending on
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light
will illuminate for that location).
● Pacific
● Mountain
● Central
● Eastern
● Atlantic

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

LHA1403

WHA1404

Others settings

Comfort settings

Select the “Others” key. Comfort settings, language and units and Voice Recognition settings
will be displayed.

Select the “Others” key, then select the “Comfort” key. The Comfort settings screen will be
displayed.
You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the key for the desired item. The indicator light (box at the right of the selected item)
alternately turns on and off each time the item is
touched.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1405

Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
any door is unlocked.
Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity
of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower
(left). After selecting the item, touch the “+” or “-”
key to change the setting.
Light Off Delay: Select to change the duration
of the automatic headlight off timer. After selecting the item, touch the “+” or “-” key to change
the setting. The available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 150 and 180 seconds.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automatically according to the vehicle speed.
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock
operation is performed again within one minute.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch.
Return All Settings to Default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems
to their default settings.

LHA1250

LHA1251

Language & Units:

Select Language:

Select the “Language & Units” key. Select the key
of the setting you wish to change.

Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to
change the language shown on the display.
If you select the “Français” key, French language
will be displayed, so please use the French Owner’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,
please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Order Information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.

Phone settings
For phone settings refer to “Bluetooth姞 HandsFree Phone System with Navigation System” in
this section.

Bluetooth姞 settings
For Bluetooth姞 phone settings, refer to
“Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.
LHA1252

Select Units:

For Bluetooth姞 audio settings, refer to
“Bluetooth姞 streaming audio” in this section.

Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.

Volume & beeps settings

Voice Recognition:

For navigation volume settings, refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding these settings.

For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.

Navigation settings
Refer to the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for information regarding these settings.

Navigation volume

Phone volume
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1253

Switch beeps
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.

BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
button. Pressing the button again will
the
or the
change the display to the day
display.
night
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
When the shift selector is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a
rearward view from the vehicle.

WARNING
● The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
LHA1254

Press and hold the
button for more than
two seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.

● The RearView Monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
● Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
● Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.

● When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
● Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.

CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and
distances to objects with reference to the bumA are displayed on the monitor.
per line 䊊

● Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is installed beside the license plate light.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.

LHA0437

They are indicated as reference distances to
objects. The lines and colors in the display indiA in
cate distances from the back bumper line 䊊
the illustration.
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊
4
䊊

1.5 ft (0.5 m) red
3 ft (1 m) yellow
7 ft (2 m) green
10 ft (3 m) green

The vehicle clearance lines are wider than
the actual clearance.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA1504

Backing up on a steep uphill

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
place 䊊
B . Note that any object on
the hill is the place 䊊
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
place 䊊
B . Note that any object on
the hill is the place 䊊
the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

WHA1505

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Backing up behind a projecting object
C is shown farther than the position
The position 䊊
B in the display. However, the position 䊊
C is
䊊
A.
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
A if the object projects over the
the position 䊊
actual backing up course.

LHA1272

Type A

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the quality of the
screen differs depending on the type of screen
present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without a touch screen (Type A):
WHA1506

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● To adjust the Brightness and Contrast,
press the ENTER button on the audio system repeatedly until the desired setting is
displayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the display to the desired level.

● Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and
Color of the RearView Monitor while the
vehicle is moving.

OPERATING TIPS
● When the shift selector is shifted to R (Reverse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.

LHA1238

Type B
● Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
For vehicles with a touch screen (Type B):
● To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Display
ON/OFF and Color of the RearView Monitor, press the SETTING button and then
select the “Display” key with the RearView
Monitor on. When the display adjustment
screen appears, touch the “–” or “+” key on
the desired item and adjust the level.

● It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the RearView Monitor screen is displayed completely. When the shift selector is returned to
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take
some time until the screen changes. Objects
on the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display objects. This is not a malfunction.
● When strong light directly enters the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.

● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
● The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
● When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the SETTING button or ENTER
button may not change the brightness.
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
● If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not display objects. Clean the camera.
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
● Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
● Do not use body wax on the camera window.
If body wax does get on the camera window,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

VENTS

WHA0736

Right and Left
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.

WHA0737

Center

Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
to open the vents or
the dial toward the
toward the
to close them.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA0688

Rear (sedan, if so equipped)

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.

WHA1407

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Fan speed control/system OFF dial
Air flow control buttons
Temperature control dial
Air conditioner button
Rear window defroster
MAX A/C button
Front windshield defrost button
Air recirculation button

CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.

MAX — Air flows from center and side
A/C
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets and
foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.

Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.

Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the

button to the on position when:

● driving on a dusty road.
● to prevent traffic fumes from entering passenger compartment.
● for maximum cooling when using the air conditioner.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button
The button is provided only on vehicles equipped
with an air conditioner.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
button to
desired position and push the
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, push the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Rear window defroster switch
For more information about the rear window defroster switch, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button to the OFF position
1. Press the
for normal heating.
2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.

Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center ventilators.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the defrost/defog button

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
● To quickly remove ice or fog from the windows, turn the fan control dial to the highest
setting and the temperature control to the
full HOT position.
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on (the indibutton will come on)
cator light on the
if the outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps
mode audefog the windshield. The
tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to
be drawn into the passenger compartment
to further improve the defogging performance.

Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the
hot position.
position is selected, the air
● When the
conditioner automatically turns on if the outside temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
The indicator light on the A/C button will
come on. This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

Operating tips

2. Press the

air flow control button.

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
button to
desired position, and push in the
activate the air conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.

Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press MAX A/C or
button.

air flow control

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Push the
comes on.

button. the indicator light

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

● For quick cooling when the outside tembutton to
perature is high, push the
the ON position. Be sure to return the
to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX
A/C may be used for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

button to the OFF position.

2. Press the

air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
4. Push the
comes on.

button. The indicator light

5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Press the

air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired position.
3. Press the
comes on.

button. The indicator light

or
are selected, the air
When the
conditioner automatically turns on (the indicator
light will illuminate) if the outside temperature is
more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.

Operating tips
● Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
● After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
● The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant temperature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

WHA1408

WHA1409

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

LHA2034

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA2035

LHA2036

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
● Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)

WHA1171

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Driver temperature control dial
Air flow control buttons
Passenger temperature control dial
DUAL button
Rear defrost button
Front window defrost button
Fan speed dial/system OFF button
Air recirculation button
A/C ON/OFF button
AUTO button

WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control
dial to the left or right to set the desired
temperature. Driver and passenger temperatures can be set independently. Press
DUAL or turn the passenger temperature
control dial to the left or right to activate dual
climate control functions. Turn the passenger’s side temperature control dial to the left
or right to set the desired passenger’s temperature.
● Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.

● The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off
are also controlled automatically.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the defroster control button
to
turn the system on. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature.
● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the manual fan control to HI.
● As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the auto mode.

control is activated, the air
● When the
conditioner will automatically be turned on at
outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
the windshield. The air recirculation mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Turn the fan control dial
left or right to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the
off.

/OFF button to turn the system

Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button
to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator
light on the switch will come on.
The air recirculation button will not be activated
mode.
when the air conditioner is in DEF or

Air flow control
Press the air flow control buttons to manually
control air flow and select the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off
Press the

/OFF button.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.

OPERATING TIPS
● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
WHA0791

The sunload sensor, located on the top of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side, helps the
system maintain a constant temperature. Do not
put anything on or around this sensor.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environmentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)
RADIO
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON position, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition should be
placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.

Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

AM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a lineof-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Compact disc (CD) player (models
without Navigation System)

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a malfunction. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.

● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XM姞 satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.

CAUTION

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.

Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception.

● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
LHA0099

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

● The CD player sometimes cannot function when the compartment temperature is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
● Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with fingerprints may not work properly.
● The following CDs may not work properly:

CHECK DISC:
● Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

PRESS EJECT:

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
● Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction:
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
● CDs that are not round
● CDs with a paper label
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.

This is an error due to excessive temperature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).

CD/DVD combination player (models
with Navigation System)
● Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD
insert slot. This could damage the
CD/DVD player.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the
CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate
the player completely.
● The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
● The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot
function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high.
Decrease the temperature before use.
● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”
logo on the disc or packaging.
● Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct
sunlight.
● CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,
dirty, scratched, covered with fingerprints, or that have pinholes may not
work properly.
● The following CDs/DVDs are not guaranteed to play:
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

● Recordable compact discs (DVD±R,
DVD±R DL)

Please Eject Disc:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

This error may be due to the temperature inside the player getting too high.
Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the
EJECT button, and after a short time
reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can
be played when the temperature of the
player returns to normal. If the error
persists, consult your local dealership.

● CDs/DVDs that are not round

Unplayable File:

● CDs/DVDs with a paper label

● The file may be copy protected.

● CDs/DVDs
that
are
warped,
scratched, or have abnormal edges

● The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A
or DIVX type.

● This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.

Region Invalid

● Rewritable
compact
(DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL)

discs

● Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as
they may cause the CD/DVD player to
malfunction.

● If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of
the following messages will be displayed.
Disc Read Error:
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).

● The DVD is not for region 1 or all
regions.
● Use DVDs with a region code “1”,
“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD
entertainment system. (The region
A is displayed as a small symcode 䊊
bol printed on the top of the DVD
B .) This vehicle-installed DVD
䊊
player cannot play DVDs with a region code other than “1” or “ALL”.

● Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent
or warped and it is free of scratches.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA0484

Copyright and trademark
● The technology protected by the U.S.
patent and other intellectual property
rights
owned
by
Macrovision
Corporation and other right holders is
adopted for this system.

● This copyright protected technology
cannot be used without a permit from
Macrovision Corporation. It is limited
to personal use, etc., as long as the
permit from Macrovision Corporation
is not issued.
● Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.
● Dolby digital is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
”
● Dolby and the double D mark “
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,
Inc.
”
● DTS and DTS Digital Surround “
are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.

Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if
so equipped)
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPod姞 players. There
are some USB devices which may not be supported with this system.
● Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
● Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector.

● During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB memory stick and
dehumidify or ventilate the player completely.
● The player sometimes cannot function when
the passenger compartment temperature is
extremely high. Decrease the temperature
before use.
● Do not leave the USB memory in a place
prone to static electricity or where the air
conditioner blows directly. The data in the
USB memory may be damaged.
● Prepare the USB device by yourself because it is not equipped with the vehicle.
● The USB device cannot be formatted with
this system. If you want to format the USB
memory, use your personal computer.
● Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
● Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen.
NISSAN recommends using English language characters with USB devices.

● Do not connect the USB device if the connector or cable is wet. Allow the cable
and/or connectors to dry completely before
connecting the USB device.
● Large video podcast files cause slow responses in the iPod姞. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
● If the iPod姞 automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPod姞.
● The iPod姞 nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod姞.
● The iPod姞 nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
● An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞
nano (2nd generation).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

● If you are using an iPod姞 (3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to avoid the iPod姞 resetting itself.
iPod姞 is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.

Bluetooth姞 streaming audio (if so
equipped)
● Some Bluetooth姞 audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
● It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth姞
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth姞
module before using the Bluetooth姞 audio.
● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth姞 audio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.

● Do not place the Bluetooth姞 audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth姞 module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
● While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetooth姞 wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
● This system supports the Bluetooth姞 Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH威 is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Clarion.

● The Bluetooth姞 audio may be stopped under
the following conditions:
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
● Checking the connection to the handsfree phone.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact disc (CD) with MP3 or
WMA (models without Navigation
System)
Terms:
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.

Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.

● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windows姞 and Windows Media姞 are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

WHA1078

Playback order chart

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Specification chart:
Supported media
Supported file systems
MP3
Supported
versions*1

WMA

Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate

Tag information
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*2

CD, CD-R, CD-RW
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom

Cannot play

Poor sound quality
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
Music cuts off or skips
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
Songs do not play back in
the desired order

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

CD, DVD or USB with Compressed
Audio Files (models with Navigation
System)
The file types supported by this system are MP3,
WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.
Explanation of terms:
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,
Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. The compression reduces certain parts of sound that seem inaudible to most people.
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.

● AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
● ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Transform Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy
audio compression format developed by
Sony.
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
* Windows姞, Windows Media姞 and Windows
Vista姞 are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of
America and/or other countries.

Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB
device with compressed audio files is as illustrated.
● The folder names of folders not containing
compressed audio files are not shown in the
display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the
disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.

WHA1374

Playback order chart

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Specification chart:
Supported media

Supported file systems

MP3

Supported
versions*1

WMA*2

AAC
ATRAC

Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Sampling frequency
Bit rate
Version

Tag information (Song title and artist name)
Folder levels
Text character number limitation
Displayable character codes*3

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB 2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista姞 operating system-based computer) are not
supported.
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0
* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
8 kHz - 48 kHz
8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
32 kHz - 48 kHz
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
8 kHz - 96 kHz
16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom

Cannot play

Cause and Countermeasure
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writing application or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
player will skip to the next song.
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Compressed Video Files (models with
Navigation System)
Explanation of terms:
● DivX – DivX refers to the DivX姞 codec
owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compression of video based on MPEG-4.
● AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.
It is standard file format originated by Microsoft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can be
saved into the .avi file format for playback on
this system if it meets the requirements
stated in the table in this section. However,
all .avi files are not playable on this system
since different encodings can be used other
than the DivX姞 codec.
● ASF – ASF stands for Advanced Systems
Format. It is file format owned by Microsoft
Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet
the requirements stated in the table in this
section can be played.
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital video files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:
Media

File Systems

File Types

Bit Rates

Resolution

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD,
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
DL
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB Memory
FAT16, FAT32
.divx, .avi
Video Codecs
DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
Audio Codecs
MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
.asf
Video Codec
ISO-MPEG4
Audio Codec
G.726
.divx, .avi
Maximum Average
4 Mbps
Maximum Peak
8 Mbps
.divx, .avi
Minimum
32 x 32
Maximum
720 x 480
.asf
Minimum
32 x 32
Maximum
720 x 576

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.

RADIO button
CD button
DISP button
PRESET A·B·C button
Station select (1 - 6) buttons
pause/mute button

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section.

Audio main operation
PWR/VOL control knob

LHA0728

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

SEEK/TRACK button
CD insert slot
TUNE/FF·REW button
CD eject button
AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE
and BALANCE)

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

CLOCK button
AUX IN jack
SCAN button
RDM/RPT button
PWR/VOL control knob
AUX button

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.
If you listen to the radio with the engine not
running, place the ignition in the ACC position.
The mode (radio or CD) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off resumes
playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns
the system off.
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.

AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade and
Balance)
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as
follows:
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep
ON/OFF → Audio → Bass
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press
the AUDIO button until the desired mode appears
in
the
display.
Press
the
or
to adjust Bass
TUNE/FF·REW
and Treble to the desired level. You can also use
the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and
Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speaker.

DISP (display) button:

Clock set

Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text
about CD information in the audio display.

1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for approximately 2 seconds.

If the text information is to long to fully be displayed on the screen; press and hold the DISP
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll
through the rest of the text.

2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.
3. Press
or

the SEEK/TRACK button
to adjust the hours.

CD display mode

4. Press
or

TUNE/FF·REW
button
to adjust the minutes.

To change the text displayed while playing a CD
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
will allow you to scroll
through CD text as follows: Track number and
Track time → Album title → Song title.
● Track number displays the track number selected on the disc.

5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the
clock set mode.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK
button again to return to the regular clock display.
pause/mute button:

To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the
AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the

● Track time displays the amount of time the
track has played.

To mute or pause the audio sound, press

or
until the
TUNE/FF·REW button
desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns
off the beep sound when audio buttons are
pressed.

● Album title displays the title of the CD being
played.

the
pause/mute button. Press the
button again to resume the audio sound.

● Song title displays the title of the selected
CD track.

FM/AM radio operation

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.

Clock operation
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button
again to turn off the clock display.

FM/AM band select:
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band
as follows:
AM ←→ FM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

When the RADIO button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)
button:
Press the TUNE/FF·REW button
or
for manual tuning. To move quickly through the
channels, hold the tuning buttons down.
SEEK (tuning) button:
or
Press the SEEK/TRACK button
to tune from high to low or low to high frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN (tuning) button:
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-

cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
Station memory operations:
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to
the A, B and C preset button in any combination
of AM or FM stations.
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change
between storage banks. The radio displays
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of
presets are active.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pressed.)
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
TUNE/FF·REW
(Fast Forward, Rewind)
button:
or
When the TUNE/FF·REW button
is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
compact disc plays at an increased speed while
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
speed.

SEEK/TRACK button:
is pressed while the compact disc
When
is playing, the next track following the present
one starts to play from the beginning.
several times to skip several tracks.
Press
Each time the button is pressed, the CD advances 1 additional track. The track number appears in the display window. (When the last track
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
is pressed, the track being played
When
several
returns to the beginning. Press
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.
pause/mute button:
To pause the sound while a CD is playing, press
the
pause/mute button. “Pause” is shown
on the display. Press the
button again to
resume playing the CD.
RDM/RPT button:
When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:

Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the disc
will be mixed during play.
Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing
will be repeated.
SCAN (CDs) button:
Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds to
scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds
per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan
mode.

AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.

The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
CD EJECT:
button is pressed with a comWhen the
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
button is pressed while the
When the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.
CD IN indicator:
A CD icon indicator appears on the display when
a CD is loaded with the system on.

Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

12.
13.
14.
15.

AM-FM button
RPT button
VOL/ON-OFF control knob
RDM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the AUX button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XM姞 satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio operation precautions” earlier in this section.

Audio main operation
WHA1475

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

SCAN button
Station select (1 - 6) buttons
CD insert slot
Display screen
iPod MENU button
CD eject button

7.
8.

SEEK/CATEGORY button
SETTING/ENTER button, SCROLL/
TUNE knob
9. AUX IN jack
10. AUX button
11. CD button

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this feature
is active, the audio volume changes as the driving
speed changes.
Setting control knob (Audio, Display and
Clock):
Press the SETTING button to adjust the audio,
display and clock settings as follows:
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Speed
Sensitive Volume (SSV) (if so equipped) →
Brightness → Contrast → On-screen Clock →
Clock Adjust → Bass
Once the desired setting is displayed on the
screen, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob left or right
to adjust the chosen setting. Press the SETTING
button to move to the next setting or wait approximately five seconds to exit the setting adjustment
mode.

LHA1270

LHA1271

Audio settings:

Speed Sensitive Volume (if so equipped):

Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance by
selecting the desired setting with the SETTING
button and then adjusting the level with the
SCROLL/TUNE knob. Balance adjusts the
sound between the left and right speakers. Fade
adjusts the sound between the front and rear
speakers.

To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,
choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) setting with the SETTING button and then adjust the
level with the SCROLL/TUNE knob. Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the
audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed
changes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

LHA1272

LHA1273

LHA1274

Display settings:

On-screen Clock:

Clock adjust:

To adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
screen, press the SETTING button until the chosen setting is displayed. Use the SCROLL/TUNE
knob to adjust the display to the desired level.

The clock is shown in the upper right corner of
the screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enable
the clock display after it has been turned off,
press the SETTING button until the On-screen
Clock
mode
is
displayed.
Use
the
SCROLL/TUNE knob to toggle the feature on or
off.

To adjust the time, perform the following steps:
1. Press the SETTING button repeatedly until
the Clock Adjust mode is displayed on the
screen.
2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust the
hours by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.
3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust the
minutes by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod姞 MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod姞 operations. See “iPod姞 player operation without Navigation System” later in this section for details
about the function of this button.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

When the AUX button is pressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn
the radio on.

AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM

*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an
XM姞 satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.

If another audio source is playing when the
AM·FM button is pressed, the audio source playing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.

If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.

SCROLL/TUNE knob (Tuning):

AM·FM button:
Press the AM·FM button to change the band as
follows:

Turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:

SAT band select:
Pressing the AUX button will change the band as
follows:
AUX → XM1* → XM2* → AUX (satellite, if so
equipped)

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
or
to tune from low to high or high to low
frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting
station.

SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM·FM select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.

SEEK/CATEGORY

Compact disc (CD) player operation

button:

(Reverse or Fast Forward)

Press

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.

hold

the

SEEK/CATEGORY

button
or
for 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The compact disc plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the compact disc returns to normal play speed.

If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.

and

SEEK/CATEGORY button:
LHA1275

CD/MP3 display mode:
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, information such as Artist, Song and Folder will be displayed.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well. For example, the
first track out of fourteen total is currently playing.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
while
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
several times
SEEK/CATEGORY button
to skip backward several tracks.
while
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY
several times to skip forward sevbutton
eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the
first track on the disc is played. If the last track in
a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first
track of the next folder is played.

SCROLL/TUNE knob (MP3/WMA CD
only):
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is playing, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRK RPT → OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.

RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while a compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 DISC RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF
1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played
randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
AUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is
also used to switch the audio system to a source
plugged into the USB input jack in the center
console. When a device is plugged into the AUX
IN jack while another device is plugged into the
USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle
between the two functions.
For more information about the USB input jack,
see “USB interface” in this section.
EJECT button:
button is pressed with a comWhen the
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
button is pressed twice with a
When the
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will
reload.

Additional features
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models without Navigation System)” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

11.

button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to access satellite radio stations unless optional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XM姞 satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVD
PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio operation precautions⬙ in this section.

Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:

LHA1391

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

OPEN/TILT button (Screen tilts down to
expose CD/DVD insert slot)
Display screen
SETTING button
AUDIO button/control knob
Station select (1 - 6) buttons

6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Seeking button
VOL/ON·OFF control knob
DISC·AUX button
XM button*
FM·AM button

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.

This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade):
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level
between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speakers.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob repeatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.
If the control knob is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.

LHA1236

LHA1256

Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
the SETTING button. Select the “Audio” key to
display the audio settings screen. Select the “–”
key or “+” key to change the SSV level.
While in this screen you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, select the “Back” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.
● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
Some of this text might not display while playing a
regular CD.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM band select:
LHA1257

Display album cover art:
When an audio source encoded with album
cover art is played, the album cover art can be
displayed on the screen. To toggle this feature on
or off, touch the “Display Album Cover Art” key.
When the feature is activated, the amber indicator next to the word ON will illuminate.

LHA1258

CD, DVD or USB with compressed audio
files
While listening to a CD or compressed audio
files, certain text might be able to be displayed
(when CD encoded with text is being used).
Depending on how the CD or compressed audio
files are encoded, the following text might be
displayed:
● Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
● File displays the name of the file currently
playing.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band
as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
When the FM·AM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM
button is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate
during FM stereo reception. When the stereo
broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automatically change from stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:
To manually tune the radio, turn
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.
Seeking button:

XM band select:
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio reception will not be available unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an XM姞 satellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.

the

For AM or FM:
side of the seeking button to
Press the
tune from high to low frequencies and stop at the
side
next broadcasting station. Press the
of the seeking button to tune from low to high
frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting
station.
For XM:
or
side of the seeking
Press the
button to go to the first channel of the previous or
next category.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:

2. Tune to the desired station using
seeking button. Press and
the
hold any of the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset number is updated on the display and the sound is briefly
muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same manner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
List (AM and FM)
Select the “List” key to see a list of the presets in
the AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks.

Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
XM radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 – if so
equipped).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or choose
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the XM button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

– Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a
favorite artist or song is playing on XM.
The audio system must be playing XM
radio for this feature to work.
– Delete a favorite artist or song.
● Categories – Displays a category list for XM
radio. Select a category to select the first
channel for that category.
● Direct Tune – Tune to a channel by entering
the channel number.
Radio data system (RDS):
LHA1375

Menu (XM, if so equipped)
Select the “Menu” key to see a list of options:
● Preset List – Displays the list of presets.
Press and hold the key on the touchscreen
to save a preset.
● Customize Channel List – deselect channels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDER
knob.
● Favorite Artist & Songs
– Tags the current artist or song playing on
XM as a favorite.

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Currently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
RDS can display:
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
● Music or programming type such as “Classical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
● Station specific text.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
text information is automatically displayed.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1413

Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. The CD/DVD insert slot is located behind the display screen. To insert a CD, press the
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display
screen will automatically move down to expose
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the CD into the
slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be
guided automatically into the slot and begin playing. To return the display screen to its upright
position after the CD is inserted, press the
OPEN/TILT button again.
If the radio is already operating, it will automatically turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the compact disc was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
disc.
DISC·AUX button:
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
to play.
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
Seeking button:
When the
side of the seeking button is
pressed while a compact disc is playing, the track
being played returns to its beginning. Press several times to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will go back the number of times the
button is pressed.

the button is pressed. (When the last track on the
compact disc is skipped through, the first track
will be played.)
Seeking (Rewind and
Fast Forward) button:
side of the seeking
Press and hold the
button or the
side of the seeking button
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
TUNE/FOLDER knob
While playing a CD with compressed audio files,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to play
the next or previous folder.

LHA1258

CD menu
Touch the “Menu” key on the display while a CD
or CD with compressed audio files is playing to
bring up a list of options. Depending on the type
of CD being played, the following options may be
available:

side of the seeking button is
When the
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
next track will start to play from its beginning.
Press several times to skip through tracks. The
compact disc will advance the number of times

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

LHA1259

● Play Mode
This option allows you to alter the play pattern of
the CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish to
apply. The modes change the play pattern as
follows:

LHA1262

Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential
order until stopped.

1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.
1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc are
played randomly.
1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CD
only) - the current folder is repeated.
1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CD
only) - tracks from the current folder are played
randomly.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1260

● Folder List
The folders on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from
that folder.

LHA1261

● Track List
The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a track name to begin playing that track.

LHA1267

● Title Text Priority
● Record to Music Box, Automatic Recording,
Recording Quality
For more information about these options, see
“Music Box姞” in this section.

LHA1415

CD EJECT button:
To eject a CD, press the OPEN/TILT button to
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in
button to
the lowered position, press the
1 . The CD will
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot 䊊
be ejected.
button is pressed while the CD
When the
is being played, the CD will eject and the system
will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the auxiliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the
display. The output from the device will be played
through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)
Park position and the parking brake engaged)
and audio system.

WHA1532

WHA1393

AUX (auxiliary) input jacks

AUX settings

The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the
1 . NTSC compatible devices
center console 䊊
such as video games, camcorders and portable
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system
through the auxiliary input jacks.

Select the “Settings” key.

The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for identification purposes:
● Red – right channel audio input
● White – left channel audio input
● Yellow – video input

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or
Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,
Medium or High.

Additional features
For more information about the iPod姞 player
available with this system, see “iPod姞 player operation with Navigation System” in this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models with Navigation System)” in this section.

DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)
PLAYER OPERATION (models with
Navigation System)
Precautions
Start the engine when using the DVD entertainment system.

LHA1394

For more information about the Music Box姞 feature available with this system, see “Music Box姞”
in this section.
For more information about the Bluetooth姞
streaming audio feature available with this system, see “Bluetooth姞 streaming audio” in this
section.

Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie
is played. To view movies on the front display,
stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift
selector to the P (Park) position and apply the
parking brake.

CAUTION
● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liquids may cause the system to
malfunction.
● While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
DVD player does not guarantee complete functionality of all VIDEO-CD
formats.

WARNING
● The driver must not attempt to operate
the DVD system or wear the headphones while the vehicle is in motion so
that full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
● Do not attempt to modify the system to
display a movie on the front screen
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing
so may distract the driver and may
cause a collision and serious personal
injury or death.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

To eject a DVD, press the OPEN/TILT button to
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in
button to
the lowered position, press the
1 . The DVD
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot 䊊
will be ejected.
DISC-AUX button
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front
seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while
watching the images.
Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode
is active on the display.
LHA1415

Playing a DVD
Inserting/Ejecting the DVD
The CD/DVD insert slot is located behind the
display screen. To insert the DVD, press the
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display
screen will automatically move down to expose
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the DVD into the
slot with the label side facing up. The DVD will be
guided automatically into the slot and begin playing. To return the display screen to its upright
position after the DVD is inserted, press the
OPEN/TILT button again.

When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed automatically.
The operation screen will be turned on when the
DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is
playing. The operation screen will turn off automatically after a period of time. To turn it on again,
press the DISC-AUX button.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1376

DVD operation keys
When the DVD is playing without the operation
screen being shown, you may use the touchscreen to select items from the displayed video.
When the operation screen is being shown, use
the touchscreen to select an item from the displayed menus.
PAUSE:
key to pause the DVD. To reSelect the
key.
sume playing the DVD, use the

Top Menu:

PLAY:
key to start playing the DVD or
Select the
resume playing the DVD after it has been paused.
STOP:
Select the

When the “Top Menu” key is selected while the
DVD is playing, the top menu specific to each
disc will be displayed. For details, see the instructions attached to the disc.

DVD settings
key to stop playing the DVD.

NEXT/PREVIOUS
CHAPTER:
key to skip the chapter(s) of the
Select the
disc forward. Select the
key to skip the
chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters
will advance forward or backward the number of
times the respective key is touched.
CM SKIP:
This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVDor
key to fast forward
VR. Select the
or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM
settings. For more information, see “DVD settings” in this section.
Next/Prev:
This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the
“+” or “-” key to advance or rewind the still image.
The still image will advance or rewind the number
of times the key is touched.

Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
● Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Displays the operation keys for the specific
DVD menu.
– Select the directional keys to move the
cursor on the DVD menu.
– Select the “Enter” key to fix the selected
menu item.
– Select the “Move” key to move the location of the operation keys on the screen.
– Select the “Back” key to return to the
previous menu screen.
– Select the “Hide” key to hide the operation keys.
● Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO)
Some menus specific to each disc will be
shown. For details, see the instructions attached to the disc.

● Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
The scene with the specified title will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
● Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD)
The scene with the specified group will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
● 10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
CD-DA, DVD-VR)
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track
will be played.
● Select No. (VIDEO CD)
Select the “Select No.” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified scene will be played.
● Angle (DVD-VIDEO)
If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle
can be switched to another one. Select the
“Angle” key and use the “+” or “-” key to
change the angle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

● Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO)
When this item is turned on, an angle mark
will be shown on the bottom of the screen if
the scene can be seen from a different angle.
● Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
DVD menus are automatically configured
and the contents will be played directly
when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note
that some discs may not be played directly
even if this item is turned on.
● CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
Select the “CM Skip” key to choose the
setting time for CM backward and forward
operations. Use the “+” or “-” key to choose
a setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds.
● DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automatically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.

● Display
Adjust the image quality of the screen by
selecting the preferred adjustment items.
● Audio
Choose the preferred language for the audio.
● Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred language for the subtitles.
● Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
DVD-VR)
Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
“Cinema” mode.
● Title List (DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred title from the list.
● Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode.
● PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR)
Choose from the “PG” or “PL” mode.

● DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD)
Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number corresponding to the preferred language and
select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu
language will be changed to the one specified.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA1530

USB INTERFACE (models without
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located in the center con1 on the USB
sole. Open the protective cover 䊊
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.

Audio file operation

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons:

AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,
the AUX button toggles between the two
sources.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
LHA1280

Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well. For
example, the fourth track out of twelve total is
currently playing.

Press the SEEK/CAT button
while an audio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
several times to skip
SEEK/CAT button
backward several tracks.
while an auPress the SEEK/CAT button
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
ALL RDM → 1 FOLDER RDM → OFF
ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
TUNE/SCROLL knob:
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will return to the first track on the USB device.

The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
1 FOLDER RPT → 1 TRACK RPT → OFF
1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be repeated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indicator on the display will turn off.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA1530

USB INTERFACE (models with
Navigation System)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located in the center con1 on the USB
sole. Open the protective cover 䊊
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio and video files on
the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system and center display screen.

Audio file operation
DISC-AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the DISC-AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another audio
source is playing and a USB memory device is
inserted, press the DISC-AUX button repeatedly
until the center display changes to the USB
memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
LHA1378

When there are both audio and movie files in the
USB memory, the mode select screen is displayed. Use the touchscreen to select the preferred type of file. When there is only type of file in
the USB memory, that audio or movie operation
screen is displayed and starts to play.
When you play a file with limited playing time, the
confirmation screen will be displayed before
starting to play the file. Confirm the playing time
and select “yes” to start playing.

Seeking (Reverse or Fast
Forward) button:
Press and hold the
side of the seeking
button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to reverse the track being
side of the
played. Press and hold the
seeking button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to fast forward the
track being played. The track plays at an increased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file returns to normal play speed.

Seeking button:
Press the
side of the seeking button while
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track. Press
side of the seeking button several
the
times to skip backward several tracks.
side of the seeking button while
Press the
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
side of the
advance one track. Press the
seeking button several times to skip forward several tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB
device is skipped, the first track of the next folder
is played.
Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the touchscreen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

● Folder List/Track List
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie
Playback” key is also displayed in this list
screen and enables you to switch to the
movie playback mode.
● Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode using the
touchscreen.

LHA1294

LHA1379

Menu:

Movie file operation

There are some options available during playback. Select one of the following that are displayed on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the
following information for each item.

Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the USB
memory while watching the images.

● Movie Playback
Switch to the movie playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains movie files.
The shift selector must be in Park (P) with
the parking brake engaged to watch movies
from a USB device.

When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the USB memory inserted, the
system will turn on. If another audio source is
playing and the USB memory is inserted, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

DISC-AUX button:

Operation keys:

●

To operate the USB memory, select the desired
key displayed on the display screen.
●

Pause:
key to pause the movie file.
Select the
To resume playing the movie file, use
key.
the

●

List:

LHA1380

Settings:
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:

Stop:
Select the
movie file.

key to skip the chapter(s)
Select the
of the disc backward. The chapters will go
back the number of times the key is selected.
Press and hold the key to rewind the chapter.

Select the “List” key on the movie file operation
screen to display the file list.

Play:
key to start playing the
Select the
movie file or resume the movie file if it has
been paused.

●

Previous Chapter/Rewind:

key to stop playing the

Next Chapter/Fast Forward:
key to skip the chapter(s)
Select the
of the disc forward. The chapters will advance the number of times the key is selected. Press and hold the key to fast forward the chapter.

● Audio File Playback
Switch to the audio playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains audio files.
● Play Mode
Choose between the “Normal” or “1 Track
Repeat” play modes.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

● 10 Key Search
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and the specified file or
folder will be played.

tery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞 can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

● Display
Adjust the image quality of the screen.

To disconnect the iPod姞 from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPod姞.

● DRC
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) automatically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.

* iPod姞 is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.

● Audio
Choose the preferred language of the audio.
● Subtitle
Choose the preferred language of the subtitles.
● Display Mode
Choose between the “Normal”, “Wide”,
“Cinema” or “Full” display modes.

WHA1530

iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod姞 5th Generation version 1.2.3
● iPod姞 Classic - version 1.1

Connecting iPod姞

● iPod姞 Touch - version 2.1*

To connect an iPod姞 to the vehicle so that the
iPod姞 can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec1 on the USB jack in the center
tive cover 䊊
console. Then connect the iPod姞-specific end of
the cable to the iPod姞 and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod姞
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-

● iPod姞 Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● iPod姞 Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
● iPod姞 Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2
● iPod姞 Nano - 4th generation version 1.0.4
● iPod姞 Nano - 5th generation version 1.0.1
* Some features of this iPod姞 may not be fully
functional.

Make sure that your iPod姞 firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.

● Artists

Audio main operation

● Songs

AUX button:

● Podcasts

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the AUX button repeatedly
until the iPod姞 mode is displayed on the screen.

● Genres

If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞 is
connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod姞 mode.

● Audiobooks

If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the
iPod姞 is playing, the iPod姞 will start when the
VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.

ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are repeated.

● Albums

RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.
RDM button:
Press the RDM button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:

● Composers

TRK SHUFFLE → ALBUM SHUFFLE →
SHUFFLE OFF
TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list will
be played randomly.

● ShuffleSongs
SEEK/CAT buttons:
or
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons
skip backward or forward one track.

Interface:
The interface for iPod姞 operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPod姞 interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLL
knob and ENTER button to navigate the menus
on the screen. The iPod姞 MENU button on the
vehicle audio system is used to move up one level
in the iPod姞 menus.
Depending on the iPod姞 model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPod姞 Owner’s Manual.
● Playlists

ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is applied.

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or
for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The track plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the track returns to normal play speed.
RPT button:
Press the RPT button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:
1 TRK RPT → ALL RPT → RPT OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

tery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞 can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod姞 from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPod姞.
* iPod姞 is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
WHA1530

iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)

Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod姞 5th Generation version 1.2.3
● iPod姞 Classic - version 1.1.1

Connecting iPod姞

● iPod姞 Touch - version 2.0.0*

● iPod姞 Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1
● iPod姞 Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
● iPod姞 Nano - 3rd generation version 1.1.3
● iPod姞 Nano - 4th generation version 1.0.4
● iPod姞 Nano - 5th generation version 1.0.1
* Some features of this iPod姞 may not be fully
functional.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Make sure that your iPod姞 firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.

● Songs
● Podcasts
● Genres
● Composers
● Audiobooks
● Shuffle Songs
The following keys shown on the screen are also
available:
● Menu: returns to the previous screen.
LHA1397

LHA1398

Audio main operation

Interface:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPod姞 mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod姞
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPod姞.

The interface for iPod姞 operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPod姞 interface. Use the touchscreen to control your favorite settings.

DISC·AUX button:
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPod姞 connected, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and
the iPod姞 is connected, press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until the center display changes to
the iPod姞 mode.

●

: plays/pauses the music selected.

The following items can be chosen from the menu
list screen. For further information about each
item, see the iPod姞 Owner’s Manual.
● Now Playing
● Playlists
● Artists
● Albums

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

or
side of the seeking
When the
button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the iPod姞 is playing, the iPod姞 will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPod姞 will return to the
normal play speed.

LHA1315

LHA1399

Play mode:

Scrolling menus:

While the iPod姞 is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to display the iPod姞 menu. Touch the “Play
Mode” key to display the Play Mode screen and
adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audiobooks. For further information about each item,
see the iPod姞 Owner’s Manual.

While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first letter. To activate letter indexing, touch and hold the page up/down arrows on
the touchscreen.

Seeking button:
or
side of the seeking
When the
button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while
the iPod姞 is playing, the next track or the beginning of the current track on the iPod姞 will be
played.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of
the following:
● Push the ENTER switch on the steering
wheel.
● Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.

MUSIC BOX姞 (if so equipped)
The Music Box system can store songs from CDs
being played. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte
(GB) storage capacity.
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music
Box system:
● CDs without MP3/WMA files.
● Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.
● Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) specification in CD-Extras.
● First session of multisession disc.
Extreme temperature conditions [below ⫺4°F
(⫺20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect
the performance of the hard-disk.
NOTE:
If the hard drive needs to be replaced due
to a malfunction, all stored music data will
be erased.

LHA1263

Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.
For information on playing CDs, see “Compact Disc (CD) player operation” in this section.
2. Touch the “Start REC” key. REC CD appears on the screen.
NOTE:
● The system starts playing and recording the
1st track on the CD when the “Start REC”
key is selected.

LHA1282

● Individual tracks from a CD cannot be selected to be recorded to the Music Box hard
drive.
● The fast forward and rewind features are
disabled while the CD is recording.
● The recording process can be stopped at
any time. All tracks that were played before
the CD was stopped are stored.
● Individual tracks can be deleted from the
hard drive after the CD is recorded.
● The system records faster than it plays.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the
title is automatically displayed on the screen. For
title acquisition from the hard drive, music recognition technology and related data are provided
by Gracenote姞.

Stopping recording:
To stop the recording, touch the “Stop REC” key
on the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio
system is turned off or the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the recording also
stops.

To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”
key on the screen. The track name and album title
are displayed on the screen.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
symbol is displayed
skipping sounds, the
behind the track number.
The Music Box audio system cannot perform
recording under the following conditions:
● There is not enough space in the hard drive.
● The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.
● The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000.
Automatic recording:
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For
more information, see “Music Box settings” in this
section.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1283

Playing recorded songs
Select the Music Box audio system by using one
of the following methods:
● Press the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
For information, see “Steering wheel switch
for audio control” in this section.
● Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until
the center display changes to the Music Box
mode.
● Give voice commands.
For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition system” in this section.

Stopping playback:

TUNE/FOLDER knob:

The system stops playing when:

The TUNE/FOLDER knob skips from album to
album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the
Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,
the TUNE/FOLDER knob changes the track instead of the album. The upper right corner of the
screen indicates if the TUNE/FOLDER knob is
changing by track or album.

● Another mode (radio, CD, USB, Bluetooth姞
Audio or AUX) is selected.
● The audio system is turned off.
● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Seeking button:
side of the seeking button while
Press the
a track is playing to return to the beginning of the
side of the seeking
current track. Press the
button while a track is playing to skip to the
beginning of the next track.
side of the seekIf you press and hold the
ing button or the
side of the seeking button
for more than approximately 1.5 seconds; the
track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.
side of the seeking button or
When the
the
side of the seeking button is released,
the track will return to the normal playing speed.

LHA1284

Music Box menu
There are some options available during playback. Select the “Menu” key, then select one of
the following that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary. Refer to the following information for
each item:
● Now Playing
Lists the tracks stored in the Music Box
system. Touch the name of the track to begin
playing that track.
● Music Library
Lists the songs in the Music Library. Tracks
can be searched by Album, Artist or Genre.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

LHA1285

LHA1286

LHA1287

● My Playlists
Displays the playlists stored in the system.
Touch the “Edit” key next to a playlist to
perform the following operations for that
playlist:

– Edit Name - changes the name of the
playlist.

– Add Current Song - adds the song currently playing to the playlist.
– Add Songs by Album - adds songs to the
playlist by album.
– Add Songs by Artist - adds songs to the
playlist by artist.
– Edit Song Order - edits the order of the
songs in the playlist.

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– Delete Songs - deletes songs from the
playlist.

The “Transfer Missing Titles to USB” and “Update Gracenote from HDD” options can be used
to update the titles of songs in the Music Library.
Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote for detailed
instructions on how to update the Gracenote
database.

LHA1288

LHA1289

● Play Mode
Alters the play mode of the playlist. Touch
the key of the mode you wish to apply. The
modes change the play pattern as follows:

● Edit Music Information
Edits the information of the songs in the
Music Library.

– Normal - no play pattern is applied.
– 1 Album Repeat - the songs in the current
album are repeated.
– 1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.

– Edit Information of Current Song
– Edit Information by Album
– Update Gracenote from USB Device
– Transfer Missing Titles to USB
– Update Gracenote from HDD

– 1 Album Random - the songs in the current album are played randomly.
– All Random - all songs are played randomly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

LHA1290

Music Box settings
To set up the Music Box system to your preferred
settings, touch the “Menu” key during playback,
then touch the “Music Box Settings” key.
● Music Box Used/Free Space:
Displays the number of tracks and albums
stored on the hard drive. The percentage of
hard drive space taken up and the amount of
remaining recording time left are also shown.
● Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box system automatically starts recording
when a CD is inserted.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1291

LHA1292

● Delete Songs from Music Box:
Delete music data stored on the hard drive.
● Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.
● CDDB Version:
Shows the version of CDDB (Compact Disc
Data Base).

Gracenote姞
NOTE:
● The information contained in the
Gracenote姞 Database is not fully guaranteed.
● The service of the Gracenote姞 Database on
the Internet may be stopped without prior
notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Gracenote姞 MusicID™ Terms of Use
This device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this
device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE
DATA,
THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates,
you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID service to count queries without knowing anything
about who you are. For more information, see the

web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote MusicID Service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its online services at
any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Copyright:
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote姞. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information visit www.gracenote.com.

BLUETOOTH姞 STREAMING AUDIO
(if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth姞 audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the device
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
so that the audio files on the device play through
the vehicle’s speakers.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680;
#6,154,773,
#6,161,132,
#6,230,192,
#6,230,207,
#6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1316

Connecting Bluetooth姞 audio
To connect your Bluetooth姞 audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the SETTING button on the instrument panel.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

LHA1317

LHA1351

4. A screen will appear asking if you are connecting the device to use with the handsfree phone system. Select the “No” key.

5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be needed
by your Bluetooth姞 audio device to complete the connection process. See the
Bluetooth姞 audio device’s owner’s manual
for more information.

LHA1299

Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth姞 audio mode, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth姞 audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth姞 audio are displayed on the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

LHA1316

Bluetooth姞 audio settings

LHA1296

4. Select the “Audio Player” key.

To adjust the Bluetooth姞 audio settings, follow
the procedure below:
1. Press the SETTING button on the instrument panel.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connected Devices” key.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1297

5. A list of the connected Bluetooth姞 audio
players is displayed. Select the name of the
device you wish to edit.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA1298

6. The Device Name and Device Address are
displayed on the screen. Select the “Select”
key to make this device the active
Bluetooth姞 audio player. Select the “Edit”
key to edit the details of the player, such as
Device Name. Select the “Delete” key to
delete the device.

LHA0049

CD CARE AND CLEANING
● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
● Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

LHA0752

LHA0753

Type A

1.
2.
3.

Source select and Power on switch
Tuning switch
Volume control switch

LHA0754

Type B

1.
2.
3.

Source select and Power on switch
Tuning switch
Volume control switch

Type C

1.
2.
3.

Source select and Power on switch
Menu control switch/ENTER button
Volume control switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
POWER on switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio
system on.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SOURCE select switch
Push the source select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
Type A Switch:
PRESET BANK A → PRESET BANK B → PRESET BANK C → CD* → AUX* → PRESET BANK
A.

Type C Switch:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD/DVD*→
Music Box** → USB/iPod姞* → Bluetooth姞 Audio* → AUX* → AM.

** This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box system.

While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
or
to
B or C), use the tuning switch
select one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).

Volume control switch

* When using the SOURCE switch, the audio
mode switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or
FM2) or XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2) that was
last active. To switch between the FM1 and FM2
preset banks or the XM1 and XM2 preset banks,
use the controls on the audio system.
** These modes are only available when compatible media is connected to the system.

or
for less
Push the tuning switch
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.

* These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device.

Type B Switch:
AM → FM* → XM* (satellite radio, if so equipped)
→ CD** → USB/iPod** → AUX** → AM

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.

Tuning (Type A and
Type B switches only)
Memory change (radio):
While in one of the preset radio station banks,
push the tuning switch
or
for less
than 1.5 seconds to change to the next preset
station in memory.
Seek tuning (radio):

Menu control
switch/ENTER button
(Type C switch only)
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or
downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.
For most audio sources, tilting the switch
up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a
different function than a tilting up/down for less
than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
● Press the ENTER button to show the list of
preset stations.

or
for more
Push the tuning switch
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
radio station.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

XM (if so equipped):
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.
● Press the ENTER button to show the XM
Menu.
iPod姞:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Press the ENTER button to show the iPod
Menu.
CD:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files).
● Press the ENTER button to show the CD
Menu.
DVD:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.

● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the title number.
● Press the ENTER button to select an item
from the DVD display.
● When the transparent operation menu appears, the switch will control the menu.
USB:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number.
● Press the ENTER button to show the USB
Menu.
Music Box:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the album (folder)
number (if playing compressed audio files).
● Press the ENTER button to show the Music
Box Menu.
Bluetooth姞 Audio:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

AUX:
● Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
Menu.

ANTENNA
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.

CAUTION
● Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
● When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.

WARNING
● A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular telephones while driving.
● If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.

BLUETOOTH姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
CAUTION
● Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control
modules.
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with
the previously connected cellular phone turned on
and carried in the vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth姞
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
● Some Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular phones may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone module. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connecting
instructions.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
WHA1042

Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth姞 wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the invehicle phone module, no other phone connecting
procedure is required. Your phone is automatically
connected with the in-vehicle phone module when

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.

● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.

● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.

● While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth姞 wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
● If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.

BLUETOOTH威 is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon.

FCC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth姞 Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.

1. This device may not cause interference and

Initialization

2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
button is
which takes a few seconds. If the
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.

IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:

● If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a
clear voice.

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.

● If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system is waiting for a
response.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.

● You can cancel a command when the system is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
button on the
also press and hold the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.

● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the
button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the microphone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
● If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
● In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
button on the steering
pressing the
wheel.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
button and after the tone
press the
say, “Call Redial.”
NOTE:
The combined command of Call and (a
Name) cannot be used.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
● Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and

● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”

● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue entering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six two zero zero”
● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (available when using the “Special number” command and the “Send” command during a
call).
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
number” in this section for more information.

NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
LHA0757

CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth姞 HandsFree Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.

PHONE/SEND
Press the
button to initiate
a VR session or answer an incoming call.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

You can also use the
button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition system is active, press and hold
the
button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
TUNING SWITCH
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.

GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For additional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.

Choosing a language

NOTE:

You can interact with the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.

You must press the
button within 5
seconds to change the language.

To change the language, perform the following.

5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.

button for more

1. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press the
) button for the
PHONE/SEND (
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
) button to select a difPHONE/END (
ferent language.”
button.

3. Press the

For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the language to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
) button. To
press the PHONE/SEND (
select a different language, tilt the tuning
switch (

) up or down.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
Main Menu
A
“Connect phone” 䊊
B
“Add phone” 䊊

C
Initiate from handset 䊊
D
Name phone 䊊

1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
A . The system ac2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.

B . The system acknowl3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊
edges the command and asks you to initiate
C.
connecting from the phone handset 䊊

The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Owner’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
D.
phone 䊊
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.

Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
A
“Call” 䊊

four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Dialing”. See “How to say numbers” in this section for more information.

B
“Phone Number” 䊊

5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and announces the available commands.

D
“Dial” 䊊

D . The system acknowledges
6. Say: “Dial” 䊊
the command and makes the call.

C
Speak the digits 䊊

1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
A . The system acknowledges
2. Say: “Call” 䊊
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.

Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
B . The system ac3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.

4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
C . If the
the area code in single digit format 䊊
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For example, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five

For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.

Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the
on the steering wheel.

button

NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
button
hear the ring tone, press the
on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”

B
(Speak Digits) 䊊

“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”

“Phonebook”

A
(Speak name) 䊊

“Recent Calls”

“Phone Number”

“Connect Phone”

button on
When you press and release the
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the commands in each sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.

B
(Speak Digits) 䊊

C
“Special Number” 䊊

D
“Redial” 䊊

E
“Call Back” 䊊

A
(Speak name) 䊊

If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.

If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.

If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.

If there are multiple locations associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the location.

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
C
“Special Number” 䊊

For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
D
“Redial” 䊊

Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
E
“Call Back” 䊊

Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, repeats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back” and
ends the VR session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
button on the steering
available. Press the
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter commands.
● “Help” — The system announces the available commands.
● “Go back/Correction” — The system announces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during
a call. For example, if you were directed to
dial an extension by an automated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR session and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call command to transfer the call from the Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free System,
button.
press the

“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.

B
“Delete Entry” 䊊
C
“List Names” 䊊

For phones that do not support automatic download of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞 profile), the “Phonebook” command is used to manually add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with
Phone B.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth姞 communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.

“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)

The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”

The “Transfer Entry” command is not available when the vehicle is moving.

The system confirms the name, location and
number.
B
“Delete Entry” 䊊

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system recognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
C
“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel. The system ends the VR session.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Main Menu
“Phonebook”
A
“List Names” 䊊

B
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
C
“Delete Entry” 䊊

D
“Record Name” 䊊

For phones that support automatic download of the
phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞 profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries
in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of
an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth姞 system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record name” in this section.

NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
A
“List Names” 䊊

Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
button on the steering
by pressing the
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record name” command in this section for information about recording custom voice tags for list
entries that the system has difficulty pronouncing.
B
“Transfer Entry” 䊊

Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth姞 communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.

The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
C
“Delete Entry” 䊊

Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system recognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
D
“Record Name” 䊊

The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.

“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
A
“Outgoing” 䊊

B
“Incoming” 䊊
C
“Missed” 䊊

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

Use the Recent Calls command to access outgoing, incoming or missed calls.
A
“Outgoing” 䊊

Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
B
“Incoming” 䊊

Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
C
“Missed” 䊊

Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.

Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetooth姞 function on the vehicle.
A
“Add Phone” 䊊

Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
B
“Select Phone” 䊊

Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Connect Phone”

C
“Delete Phone” 䊊

NOTE:

Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The system will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete that phonebook for that phone.

The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
A
“Add Phone” 䊊

B
“Select Phone” 䊊

C
“Delete Phone” 䊊

D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent
a wireless connection to your phone.

D
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-ofdialect users to train the system to improve recognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model of
their own voice that is stored in the system. The
system is capable of storing a different speaker
adaptation model for each connected phone.

Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine running, the parking brake on, and the transmission in P (Park).
3. Press and hold the
than 5 seconds.

button for more

4. The system announces: “Press the
) button for the
PHONE/SEND (
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
) button to select a difPHONE/END (
ferent language.”

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions provided by the system.

● phonebook transfer entry

●
●
●
●
●

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete phone

7. When preparation is complete and you are
button.
ready to begin, press the

● transfer entry

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.

● delete all entries

5. Press the

button.

For information on selecting a different language, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.

9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
10. The system will announce that speaker adaptation has been completed and the system is ready.
The SA mode will stop if:

Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)

● delete call back number
● incoming
● eight pause nine three two pause seven
● call seven two four zero nine
● phonebook delete entry
● next entry
● dial star two one seven oh
● yes

call three one nine oh two
nine seven pause pause three oh eight
cancel
call back number
call star two zero nine five

● dial eight three zero five one
● record name
● four three pause two nine pause zero
● delete redial number
● phonebook list names
● call eight oh five four one
● correction
● connect phone
● dial seven four oh one eight
● previous entry
● delete

● no

● dial nine seven two six six

button is pressed for more than 5
● The
seconds in SA mode.

● select

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● dial eight five six nine two

● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.

● Bluetooth on

● missed

● call seven six three oh one
● go back
● call five six two eight zero
● dial six six four three seven

● outgoing

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

MANUAL CONTROL
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
) button. At that
holding the PHONE/END (
) button
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND (
will start the Hands Free Phone System.

● To go back to the previous menu, press the
) button. If the current
PHONE/END (
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
) button will exit the
PHONE/END (
Phone system.
● To exit the manual control mode, press and
) button for 5
hold the PHONE/END (
seconds.

Operating tips
● To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
(
speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙ when
manual controls are initially activated.
● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
) switch up or down. The system will
(
always speak the current menu option. Depending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
● To select the current menu option, press the
) button.
PHONE/SEND (

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to improve the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

BLUETOOTH姞 HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.

WHA1501

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle

phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth姞
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this section.
Before using the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
● Some Bluetooth姞 enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone
module.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recommended phone list and connecting.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.
● Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impossible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.

● If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for troubleshooting help.
● Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
● The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
● If reception between callers is unclear, adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” in
this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and

BLUETOOTH威 is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Clarion.

VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.

2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations.

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1236

CONNECTING PROCEDURE
1. Press the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select the “Bluetooth” key
on the display.

LHA1316

2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

LHA1317

LHA1318

3. A popup box will appear on the screen,
prompting you to confirm that the connection is for the phone system. Select the “Yes”
key.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the Bluetooth姞 cellular phone to
enter the PIN code.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on connecting recommended
cellular phones.
When the connecting is complete, the
screen will return to the Bluetooth姞 settings
screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

LHA1320

LHA1321

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key

This vehicle has two phonebooks available for
your use. Depending on your phone, the system
may automatically download your entire cell
phone’s phonebook into the “Handset Phonebook”. For the details on downloading your
phonebook, see “Handset phonebook” in this
section. If your phonebook does not automatically download, you may set up the vehicle
phonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebook
allows you to record a name to speak while using
voice recognition.

3. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the
screen.

1. Press the
wheel.

4. Choose the method for entering the phonebook entry. For this example, select “Enter
Number by Keypad”.
5. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. For
more information, see “How to use the touch
screen” in this section.

button on the steering

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1381

6. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name
to speak when using the Voice Recognition
system.
7. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak
the name after the tone.
8. When the voicetag is successfully saved
), select the “OK” key to save the
(
phonebook entry.
9. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will
show a screen that is ready to call the number. Select the “Back” key to return to the
Vehicle Phonebook.

● Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of your incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were downloaded from your cell phone (depending on
your phone’s compatibility). You may select
one of these entries to save in the vehicle
phonebook.
● Copy from the Handset
The system will show your cell phone’s
phonebook that was downloaded (depending on your phone’s compatibility). You may
select one of these entries to save in the
vehicle phonebook.
LHA1382

● Editing the Vehicle Phonebook
1. Press the
wheel.

button on the steering

2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key.
3. Select the desired entry from the displayed
list.
4. Select the “Edit” key.

LHA1383

5. Select the desired item to change.
The following editing items are available:
● Entry #
Changes the displayed number of the selected entry.
● Name
Edit the name of the entry using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
● Number
Edit the phone number using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
● Type
Select the icon from the icon list.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

● Voicetag
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system. For more information,
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in
this section.

To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle
manually, follow these steps:

To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step
3.

3. Select the “Download Handset Phonebook”
key.

1. Press the SETTING button on the instrument panel.
2. Select the “Phone” key.

HANDSET PHONEBOOK
Many phones will support an automatic download of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Since
this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be
stored and entries are automatically assigned
voice tags by the system, this is a useful function
for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recognition system.

Once the handset phonebook is transferred to
the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing
button on the steering wheel, then
the
selecting the “Handset Phonebook” key.
LHA1319

Transferring the handset phonebook
If your cellular phone supports automatic downloading, the system transfers the handset phonebook automatically by default. To ensure that this
feature is activated, press the SETTING button
on the instrument panel and select the “Phone”
key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection should
have the amber indicator next to the word ON
activated. Select the “Auto Downloaded” key to
toggle this feature on or off.

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Whether the handset phonebook is transferred
manually or automatically, the process can take
up to five minutes to complete, depending on the
size of the handset phonebook. See the cellular
phone’s owner’s manual for more details.

● Call History: Select the name from the incoming or outgoing call history.
● Dial Number: Input the phone number manually using a keypad displayed on the screen.
For information on how to use the touchscreen, see “How to use the touch screen”
in this section.
3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except
“Dial Number”, dialing commences when the
listed name is selected. Dialing commences
when “OK” is selected if the number is inputted manually. The screen changes to the
“Call in Progress” screen.
LHA1322

MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the
button on the steering
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on
the display.

4. After the call is over, perform one of the
following to finish the call:
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in
Progress screen.
b. Press the
wheel.

switch on the steering

LHA1323

RECEIVING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow
one of the procedures listed below.
a. Select the “Answer” key on the display.
button on the steering

2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:

b. Press the phone
wheel switches.

● Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.

● Handset Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the handset phonebook.

Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

Hold Call:
Put an incoming call on hold.

Keypad:
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voicemail.

Reject Call:
Reject an incoming call.

NOTE:

To finish the call, follow one of the procedures
listed below:

switch on the
Pushing the TALK
steering wheel during a call allows numbers and digits to be sent using Voice Recognition.

a. Select the “Reject Call” key on the display.
b. Press and hold the phone
steering wheel switches.

button on the

Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is selected.
Mute will be cancelled.
LHA1324

DURING A CALL
There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the
screen, if necessary:
Hang up:
Finish the call.
Use Handset:
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, press the volume control switch located
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume
control knob on the instrument panel while talking
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.

Download Handset Phonebook:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
adding, editing and deleting contacts in the
handset phonebook.

LHA1324

LHA1319

ENDING A CALL

PHONE SETTINGS

To finish the call, perform one of the following
procedures:

To set up the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Phone” key on the display.

● Select the “Hang up” key on the “Call in
Progress” display.
● Push the
wheel.

switch on the steering

Edit Vehicle Phonebook:
See “Vehicle Phonebook” in this section for adding, editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle
phonebook.
Delete Phonebook:
Delete a phonebook stored on the system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

Edit Bluetooth Info:
Check information about the device name, device
address and device PIN.
Replace Connected Phone:
Replace the phone currently connected to the
system. This option allows you to keep any voicetags that were recorded using the previous
phone.

LHA1325

LHA1316

Volume & Ringtone:
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming
call sound and outgoing call sound. When the
“Automatic Hold” option is turned on, an incoming call will be placed on hold automatically after
several rings. When the “Vehicle Ringtone” option is turned on, a specific ringtone that is different from the cellular phone’s will sound when
receiving a call.

BLUETOOTH SETTINGS

Auto Downloaded:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
information about automatically downloading the
handset phonebook.

Connect Bluetooth:
See “Connecting procedure” in this section for
more information about connecting a phone.

To set up the Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SETTING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Bluetooth” key on the display.
Bluetooth:
Turn the Bluetooth姞 system on or off.

Connected Devices:
Display a list of the Bluetooth姞 devices connected to the system.

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
To access the settings, press the SETTING button, then select “Volume & Beeps”.
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming
voice during a call by pushing the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the
volume control knob on the instrument panel.

NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free
operation of the systems equipped on this vehicle, such as phone and vehicle information.
There are two voice recognition modes of operation available. They are:
● Standard Mode
● Alternate Command Mode

LHA1253

CALL VOLUME
Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve clarity if reception between callers is
unclear.
● Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows
you to hear a difference in volume.
● Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows
the person you are talking with to hear a
difference in volume.

In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),
commands that are available are always shown
on the display and announced by the system. You
can complete your desired operation by simply
following the prompts given by the system. Not all
NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available
while in Standard Mode.
For advanced operation, you can change to an
Alternate Command Mode that enables the operation of the display, audio, and climate control
through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this
mode is active, an expanded list of commands
can be spoken after pushing the TALK
switch on the steering wheel, and the voice command menu prompts are turned off.
In Alternate Command Mode the recognition
success rate may be affected because the number of available commands and the ways of
speaking each command are increased. See
“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Command Mode” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

To improve the recognition success rate when
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” in this
section. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alternate Command Mode be turned off and Standard
Mode be used for the best recognition performance.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
STANDARD MODE

While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system for certain Phone and Navigation features,
you can switch to using manual controls (touchscreen, steering wheel controls) and the information you have already entered by voice control will
be retained. To switch to manual controls, select
the “Manual Controls” key on the display when it
appears. The system will respond by speaking
“Changing to manual operation. Please use
manual controls to continue.”

Displaying user guide

The Standard Mode enables control of navigation, phone and vehicle information. With this
setting active, commands that are available are
always shown on the display and announced by
the system.

If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system
for the first time or you do not know how to
operate it, you can display the User Guide for
confirmation.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.

For the voice commands for the navigation system, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
Manual of your vehicle.
For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting
is the Standard Mode. See “NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode” in this section. For vehicles in Canada, the factory default setting is the
Alternate Command Mode. See “NISSAN Voice
Recognition Alternate Command Mode” in this
section.

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1326

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 and 2 by pressing
switch and saying “Help”.
the
3. Select the “User Guide” key.
4. Select an item.

Available items:

Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Recognition system

● Getting Started

If you choose “Finding a Street Address”, “Using
the Address Book” or “Placing Calls”, you can
view tutorials on how to perform these operations
using Voice Recognition.

Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
● Let’s Practice
Initiates a practice session that demonstrates how to improve voice recognition by
the system.
● Using the Address Book
Tutorial for using the Address Book
● Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
● Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
● Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
command recognition by the system.

LHA1329

Getting started
Before using the Voice Recognition system for
the first time, you can confirm how to use commands by viewing the Getting Started section of
the User Guide.
1. Select the “Getting Started” key.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

LHA1327

Let’s Practice
The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows
you to practice saying commands and receive
feedback on the volume, speed and timing of your
speech.

LHA1328

To initiate a practice session, access the User
Guide and select the “Let’s Practice” key. Follow
the on-screen prompts until the session is complete. After the session is completed, a screen
will be displayed that shows an analysis of different elements of your speech. Select the “Try
Again” to repeat the session if improvement is
needed. Select the “Done” key to return to the
User Guide screen.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1330

Useful tips for correct operation
You can display useful speaking tips to help the
system recognize your voice commands correctly.
1. Select “Help on Speaking”.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
switch is pressed before the initializathe
tion completes, voice commands will not be accepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Recognition initialization is completed.

BEFORE STARTING
LHA1331

Voice recognition settings
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Recognition system are described.
1. Select “Voice Recognition”.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.

To get the best recognition performance from
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
● The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the
system from correctly recognizing the voice
commands.

LHA0768

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS
1. Press the
ing wheel.

switch located on the steer-

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
● Speak in a natural conversational voice without pausing between words.
● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

● Commands that are available are always
shown on the display and spoken through
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
those that are displayed are not accepted.
Please follow the prompts given by the system.
● If the command is not recognized, the system repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
switch on the steering
● Press the
wheel to return to the previous screen.

LHA1333

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Would you like
to access Phone, Navigation, Information,
Audio or Help?”
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
to
, speak
screen changes from
a command.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
and speak after the tone sounds until your
desired operation is completed.

Operating tips
● Say a command after the tone. Voice commands cannot be accepted when the icon
.
is

● If you want to cancel the command, press
switch. The message,
and hold the
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.

How to speak numbers
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
General rule:
● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● When saying the phone number 800-6626200, the system will accept “eight-hundred”
in addition to “eight zero zero” or “eight oh oh”.
500, 700, and 900 are also supported.
Examples:
● 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
You can improve the recognition of phone numbers
by saying the phone number in three groups of
numbers. For example, when you try to call 800662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the system will then ask you for the next three digits. Then,
say “six six two”. After recognition, the system will
then ask for the last four digits. Say, “six two zero
zero”. Using this method of phone digit entry can
improve recognition performance.
NOTE:
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.

Standard Mode command list
Category Command:
COMMAND
Phone
Navigation
Information
Audio
Help

ACTION
Displays Phone function commands.
Displays Navigation function commands.
Displays Vehicle Information.
Displays Audio commands.
Displays User Guide.

Phone Command:
COMMAND
Dial Number
Change Number
Vehicle Phonebook
Handset Phonebook
Call History
International Call

ACTION
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.
Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).

Navigation Command:
COMMAND
Home
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

Information Command:
COMMAND
Traffic Info.
Where am I?

ACTION
Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Displays current vehicle location.

Audio Command:
COMMAND
AM
FM
XM
Music Box
CD

ACTION
Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.
Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.
Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio.
Changes the audio system mode to Music Box.
Changes the audio system mode to CD.

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Voice command examples
Some basic voice command examples are described here.
For navigation system commands, see the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

LHA0768

LHA1333

Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone
number 800-662-6200:

2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Audio or Help?”

1. Press the
ing wheel.

switch located on the steer-

3. Say “Phone”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

LHA1334

4. Say “Dial Number”.

LHA1335

5. Say “800”.

LHA1336

6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
7. Say “662”.

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:
● You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 continuous digits), if the area code is not necessary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is
recommended for improved recognition.
See “How to speak numbers” in this section.
● You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats, and
when special characters such as star (*),
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.
LHA1337

LHA1338

8. The system announces, “Please say the last
four digits or say change number.”

10. The system announces, “Dial or Change
Number?”

9. Say “6200”.

11. Say “Dial”.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.

● If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
● Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
● If the system does not recognize your command, please try repeating the command
using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or
too loudly may further decrease recognition
performance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

LHA0768

LHA1333

Example 2 — Placing an international call
to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:

2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Audio or Help?”

1. Press the
ing wheel.

switch located on the steer-

3. Say “Phone”.

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1334

4. Say “International Call”.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The Alternate Command Mode enables control
of the Audio, Climate Control and Display systems as well as additional commands for the
Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation systems. With this setting active, the system does
not announce or display the available commands
at each step.

LHA1339

5. Say “011811112223333”.

LHA1340

6. Say “Dial”.
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111222-3333.
NOTE:
Any digit input format is available in the
International Number input process, as
well as the special characters such as star
(*), pound (#), and plus (+).

When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an
expanded list of commands can be used after
switch. Under this
pushing the TALK
mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands
is not available on the display. Please review the
expanded command list, available when this
mode is active, as some Standard Mode commands are replaced. Please see examples of
Alternate Command Mode screens.
Please note that in this mode the recognition
success rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and ways of speaking each
command are increased. You can turn this mode
ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the
Voice Recognition Settings will change to show
more options.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

LHA1403

Activating Alternate Command Mode
1. Press the SETTING button on the instrument panel.
2. Select the “Others” key on the display.

LHA1331

LHA1341

4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.

6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and
the setting menu is expanded to include the
Alternate Command Mode options. See
“Settings menu” in this section for an explanation of the options.

5. The confirmation message is displayed on
the screen. Select the “OK” key to activate
the Alternate Command Mode.

3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

Displaying the command list
If you are controlling the system by voice commands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the following procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
switch, listen for the tone and
Press the
say, “Help”. The system will respond by displaying the command list main menu.

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1342

LHA1402

LHA1342

Only manual controls such as the touchscreen
can navigate the command list menu.

1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.

4. Select a category. The command list for the
category selected is shown.

As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,
you may access the command list using the following steps:

2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.

5. If necessary, scroll the screen to view the
entire list.

NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 and 2 if you say “Help”.

6. Select the “Back” key to return to the previous screen.

3. Select the “Command List” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

Alternate Command Mode command list
Phone Command:
COMMAND
Dial Number
Vehicle Phonebook
Handset Phonebook
International Call
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls

ACTION
Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook.
Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook.
Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.
Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.
Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Navigation Command:
COMMAND
Home
Address
Places
Address Book
Previous Destinations
Previous Start Point
Minimize Freeway Route
Fastest Route
Shortest Route
Cancel Route
Delete Destination
Birdview Map
Planview Map
North Up
Heading Up
Zoom In <1 to 13>
Zoom Out <1 to 13>
Guidance Voice ON/OFF
Guide Voice Repeat

ACTION
Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.
Sets a route to a previous destination.
Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.
Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.
Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.
Cancels the current route.
Deletes the current destination.
Changes the Map display to Birdview.
Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.
Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.
Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.
Changes the map scale to a smaller number.
Changes the map scale to a larger number.
Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.
Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133

Information Command:
COMMAND
Traffic Information
Where am I?
Weather Information
Weather Map

ACTION
Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Displays the current vehicle location.
Displays weather information.
Displays the current weather map.

Audio Command:
COMMAND
AM
FM
XM
Music Box
CD
USB
Bluetooth Audio
AUX

ACTION
Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.
Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.
Starts to play a CD.
Turns to the USB audio input.
Turns to the Bluetooth姞 audio system.
Turns to the AUX input.

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

● Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.
● Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
● Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
● Voice Recognition Settings
LHA1343

Displaying user guide
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which contains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Select the “User Guide” key.

LHA1344

4. Select an item.
Available items:
● Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
● Let’s Practice
Initiates a practice session that demonstrates how to improve recognition by the
system.
● Using the Address Book
Tutorial for using the Address Book.

Describes the available Voice Recognition
settings.
● Adapting the System to Your Voice
Tutorial for adapting the system to your
voice.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
switch is pressed before the initializathe
tion completes, the display will show the message: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135

Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice
Recognition, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
● When the climate control is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automatically for easy recognition.
● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command.
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.

LHA0768

LHA1345

switch located

2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Please say a
command from the displayed list or say Help
to show all commands.”

Giving voice commands
1. Press and release the
on the steering wheel.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from
a command.

, speak

4. Once a command is recognized, the system
will announce the recognized command and
perform the requested action.
If the command is not recognized, the system repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice after the tone.

4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Operating tips

How to speak numbers

● Say a command after the tone. Voice commands cannot be accepted when the icon
.
is

Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.

● If the command is not recognized, the system repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.

General rule:

switch on the steering
● Press the
wheel to return to the previous screen.
● If you want to cancel the command, press
switch. The message,
and hold the
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
● If you want to adjust the volume of the system feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
● To minimize the amount of prompts spoken
by the system in Alternate Command Mode,
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback
function press the SETTING button, then
select the “Others” key. Then select the
“Voice Recognition” key.

● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
● When saying the phone number 800-6626200, the system will accept “eighthundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
supported.
Examples:
● 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
You can improve the recognition of phone numbers by saying the phone number in three groups
of numbers. For example, when you try to call
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and
the system will then ask you for the next three
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
the system will then ask for the last four digits.

Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of
phone digit entry can improve recognition performance.
NOTE:
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.

Settings menu
The content of the Settings Menu differs when
the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.
Command List:
Displays the command list for Alternate Command Mode.
User Guide:
The user guide provides basic instructions for
using Voice Recognition and accessing some
voice commands.
NOTE:
The user guide can also be accessed from
within the INFO menu after pressing the
INFO button.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

Speaker Adaptation:
Starts a system training procedure to learn the
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker adaptation function” in this section.
Alternate Command Mode:
For advanced operation, an Alternate Command
Mode is provided. This setting enables control of
the Audio and Climate Control systems in addition to additional commands for the Phone and
Navigation systems. With this setting active, the
system does not announce or display the available commands at each step. When this mode is
activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will
change to show more options.
Minimize Voice Feedback:
Reduces the amount of the information spoken
for each voice instruction.

LHA1341

SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION
The Voice Recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.

Having the system learn the user’s
voice
1. Press the SETTING button on the instrument panel, select the “Others” key on the
display.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA1346

4. Select the user whose voice is to be memorized by the system.

LHA1347

LHA1348

5. Select a category to be learned by the system from the following list:

7. The system requests that you repeat a command after a tone. This command is also
displayed on the screen.

Speaker Adaptation function settings

8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
to
, speak
screen changes from
the command that the system requested.

Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on
the screen.

9. When the system has recognized the voice
command, the voice of the user is learned.

Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recognition system has learned.

● Phone
● Navigation
● Information
● Audio
● Help
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.
6. Select a voice command to train.
The Voice Recognition system starts.

switch or select the “Back” key
Press the
to return to the previous screen.
If the system has learned the command correctly,
the voice command indicator on the screen turns
on.

LHA1349

Edit Name:

Reset Result:

Continuous Learning:
When this item is turned to ON, you can have the
system learn the voice commands in succession,
without selecting commands one by one.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOGNIZED” or the system fails to interpret
the command correctly.

Solution
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in this
section.
2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.

NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
The system consistently selects the
wrong voicetag in the phonebook.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetooth姞 Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation
System” in this section.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge . . . . . . . . 5-9
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Manual transmission (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
● Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.

5-2 Starting and driving

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
● Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be
drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
air recirculation but2. Set the
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
● If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
● The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering
into
the
passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING
● The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.

CAUTION
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual
operating
conditions
are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
● Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:
● The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
● The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After all 4 tires are inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display when
the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off
when the low tire pressure warning light
turns off.
● The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.

5-4 Starting and driving

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates in low
ambient temperature, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
● The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.

FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority
to
operate
the
equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, include interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.

Starting and driving 5-5

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
If the right side or left side wheels leave the road
surface, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.

5-6 Starting and driving

● If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure
below. Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not over react.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The engine will stop when
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.

LSD2000

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch
pedal (M/T), the ignition switch position will illuminate as follows:
Push center
● once to change to ACC.
● two times to change to ON.
● three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-7

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until
the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position
(CVT) or N (Neutral) position (M/T).

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position):

● any door is opened.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed toward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.

● ignition switch changes position.

1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)
position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (M/T).
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
in the port.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF
position.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

The shift selector can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the vehicle information display. See
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section.

OFF:
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
ACC (Accessories):
This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 minutes under the following conditions:
● all doors are closed.
●

5-8 Starting and driving

shift selector is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any
of the following occur:
● shift selector is moved out of the P (Park).
ON (Normal operating position):
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.

CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving perform the following procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION
● Never place anything except the Intelligent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Doing so may cause damage to the
equipment.
● Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the
correct direction when inserting it to
the Intelligent Key port. The engine may
not start if it is in the wrong direction.
● Remove the Intelligent Key from the
Intelligent Key port after the ignition
switch is pushed to the LOCK position.
WSD0232

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost disA of the Intelligent Key
charged, the guide light 䊊
port blinks and the indicator appears on the vehicle information display. See “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the
B allows you to start the engine. Make sure
port 䊊
the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direction: The front side faces upward and the key ring
side faces downward as illustrated.

WSD0233

To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull
C.
the Intelligent Key out of the port 䊊
NOTE:
The Intelligent Key port does not charge
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the
low battery indicator, replace the battery as
soon as possible. See “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following procedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.

Starting and driving 5-9

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately 10
seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.

● Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
● Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
● Lock all doors.
● Position seat and adjust head restraints.
● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
● Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.

5-10 Starting and driving

STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) model:
Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift selector is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual transmission (M/T) model:
Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). Depress the clutch pedal to the floor.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and the clutch
pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition
switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE
● If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
● If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or
6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.

CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)

4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift selector to
the P (Park) position (CVT) or to N (Neutral)
and apply the parking brake (M/T) and push
the ignition switch to the OFF position.

Starting and driving 5-11

WARNING
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive
Sport) or (M) Manual shift mode. Always depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.

CAUTION
WSD0247

When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.

5-12 Starting and driving

The CVT can operate in two different automatic
drive modes:
● D (Drive) mode - Move the shift selector to D
(Drive), the transmission is in the normal
forward automatic driving mode. The position indicator in the meter shows a “D”. The
D (Drive) mode does not produce a gear
change sensation like a traditional automatic
transmission.
● Ds (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift selector over from D (Drive) to the left into the
manual shift gate. The position indicator in
the meter shows a “Ds”. In Ds (Drive Sport)
mode, transmission operation changes to
⬙Sporty” driving shift operation, creating a
more aggressive acceleration feeling than
the D (Drive) mode and a gear change sensation when the driver accelerates quickly.
When the driver selects M (Manual) mode
ratio with shift selector during Ds (Drive
Sport) mode operation, the driver must move
the shift selector from Ds mode to D mode
and back again to re-select Ds (Drive Sport)
mode.
● To cancel the Ds mode, return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to the automatic drive mode.

The CVT can operate in a manual drive mode:
● M (Manual) mode - With the shift selector in
the manual shift gate Ds (Drive Sport) mode,
M (Manual) mode can be selected by moving the shift selector up (+) or down (–). In M
mode, the transmission will produce noticeable upshifts and downshifts. The position
indicator in the meter shows a “M”.

The CVT is designed so the foot brake
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is pushed to the
LOCK position.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.

WSD0248

To move the shift selector:
Press the button while depressing the
brake pedal

Starting the vehicle

Press the button to shift

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
selector out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.

Shift without pressing button

Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to
any of the desired shift positions.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-13

WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift selector is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
P (Park):

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the
parking brake first, then move the shift selector
into the P (Park) position.

5-14 Starting and driving

R (Reverse):

DS (Drive Sport):

CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
drive position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.

When the shift selector is shifted from the D
(Drive) position to the manual shift gate, the
transmission enters the DS (Drive Sport) mode.
Moving the shift selector to the DS (Drive Sport)
position allows you to enjoy “sporty” driving shift
operation on a winding road and feel smooth
acceleration or deceleration on a hilly road by
moving in a lower gear automatically. When canceling the DS mode, return the shift selector to
the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to
the normal driving mode.

in the meter. When shifting the shift selector to
the manual shift gate, the position indicator displays 1 (first) up to 6 (sixth) depending on vehicle
speed.

When shifting up:

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

When shifting down:

1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6

Move the shift selector to the ⫺ (down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)

M6 (6th):
Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.
M5 (5th):
WSD0249

Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
When the shift selector is in the Ds (Drive Sport)
position, the transmission is ready for the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually by moving the shift selector up (+) or down
(–). To cancel the Ds mode, return shift selector
to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns
to automatic driving mode.
When the shift selector is shifted from D (Drive)
A with the vehicle
to the manual shift gate 䊊
stopped or while driving, the transmission enters
the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. In the manual shift mode, the
shift range is displayed on the position indicator

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or
for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
M1 (1st):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.

Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)

● The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)
● Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode:
Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position
to return the transmission to the normal driving
mode.
● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than 6
range. This reduces fuel economy.

Starting and driving 5-15

● In the manual shift mode, the transmission may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the engine speed is too high. When the vehicle speed decreases, the transmission automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.

2. Apply the parking brake.

● CVT operation is limited to automatic drive
mode when CVT fluid temperature is extremely low even if manual shift mode is
selected. This is not a malfunction. When
CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be
selected.

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
usual. This is not a malfunction.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a 3 mm
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release
cover.
● If available, a plastic trim tool can also be
used.

5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift lock
release.
WSD0250

Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift selector button pushed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your
battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section. Contact your
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
To move the shift selector, complete the following
procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

5-16 Starting and driving

If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the transmission as soon as possible.

WARNING
If the shift selector cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift
— in D position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
power and, under some conditions, vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
limited.

Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The MIL may
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is
activated, see “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-

tion. This will occur even if all electrical
circuits are functioning properly. In this
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then
push the switch back to the ON position.
The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have a
NISSAN dealer check the transmission and
repair if necessary.

WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs,
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.
The reduced speed may be lower than
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the
side of the road at a safe place and allow
the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Do not over-rev the engine when shifting to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.

CAUTION
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
● Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
● Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
● When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.

Starting and driving 5-17

1 and
To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring 䊊
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after
stopping the vehicle completely.
1 returns to its original
The shift selector ring 䊊
position when the shift selector is moved to the N
(Neutral) position.

If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).

Suggested up-shift speeds
LSD0180

Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or downshifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift selector. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed
before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise
may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,
4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according
to vehicle speed.

5-18 Starting and driving

The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
(less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
For QR25DE:
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

MPH (km/h)
8 (24)
17 (27)
25 (40)
36 (58)
51 (82)

For VQ35DE:
GEAR CHANGE
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

MPH (km/h)
9 (14)
19 (30)
26 (42)
31 (50)
37 (59)

For acceleration in high altitude areas
(over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
For QR25DE:
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

MPH (km/h)
8 (13)
17 (27)
25 (40)
36 (58)
51 (82)

For VQ35DE:
Gear change
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

MPH (km/h)
15 (24)
25 (40)
40 (64)
45 (72)
50 (80)

PARKING BRAKE
Suggested maximum speed in each
gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
GEAR
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th

QR25DE
MPH (km/h)
32 (53)
59 (95)
82 (133)
—
—
—

VQ35DE
MPH (km/h)
36 (58)
58 (93)
81 (131)
—
—
—

WARNING
● Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
● Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
● Do not use the shift selector in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.

LSD0158

Type A
To engage: Type A, firmly depress the parking
A.
brake. Type B, pull the lever up 䊊
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)
position.
CVT models:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-19

CRUISE CONTROL
● The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control switch is turned ON while
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise
control system, use the following procedures.

WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
● When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
WSD0169

Type B
3. Type A, firmly depress the parking brake
pedal and it will release. Type B, while pulling
up on the parking brake lever slightly, push
B.
the button and lower completely 䊊
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.

LSD0184

1.
2.
3.
4.

CANCEL switch
ACCEL/RES switch
COAST/SET switch
ON/OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.
● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control switch off and have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

5-20 Starting and driving

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
● On winding or hilly roads.
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
● In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
● To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
light in the instrument panel goes out.
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.

● you depress the brake or clutch pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.

● you depress the clutch pedal (manual transmission), or move the shift selector to N
(Neutral) (CVT).

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.

To resume the preset speed, push and release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-21

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine
performance.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other vehicles.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.

● Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Follow the recommended periodic maintenance schedule.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
● Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.

5-22 Starting and driving

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill grade,
place the shift selector in 1st gear.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
1
● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
SSD0488

WARNING
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
● Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for CVT
models or in an appropriate gear for
manual transmission models. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly or roll away and result in an
accident. Make sure the shift selector

has been pushed as far forward as it can
go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
2
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
3
CURB: 䊊
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key.

Starting and driving 5-23

POWER STEERING

BRAKE SYSTEM

The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at 2 wheels.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
in sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes

Parking brake break-in

The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.

Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.

WARNING
● While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.

5-24 Starting and driving

● If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.

Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
● Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.

Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.

Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

Starting and driving 5-25

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,
the VDC System helps to perform the following
functions:
● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
● Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).

● The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
● Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.

● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following conditions:

See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the ”Instruments and controls” section.

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steering input)

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and
indicator lights come on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns
off when these indicator lights are on.

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of
vehicle control in all driving situations.

5-26 Starting and driving

indiWhen the VDC system operates, the
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the
following:

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
indicator illuminates to indisystem. The
cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
indicator will not
functions are off and the
flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.

WARNING
● The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling perindicator may
formance, and the
and
indiflash or both the
cator lights may illuminate.
● If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly and both the
and the
indicator lights may
illuminate.
● If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
and
deteriorated, both the
indicator lights may illuminate.

● When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate propindicator may flash or
erly and the
and
indicator
both the
lights may illuminate. Do not drive on
these types of roads.
● When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
indicator may flash or
ramp, the
and
indicator
both the
lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
indicator may flash or both
the
and
indicator lights may
the
illuminate.
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.

Starting and driving 5-27

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry function on
the Intelligent Key.

If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

5-28 Starting and driving

3. Tire chains may be used. For details see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-ityourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
● Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
● Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
● Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
WARNING
● Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
● Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.

To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.

Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.

Starting and driving 5-29

MEMO

5-30 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

FLAT TIRE

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving perform the following procedure:

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle
information display, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being
driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure
warning light. This system will activate only when
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). For more details, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section, and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section.

WARNING
● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.

6-2 In case of emergency

● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.

WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is
shifted into P (Park).

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

● Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.

Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R
(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.

WCE0044

Blocking wheels
1 at both the front and
Place suitable blocks 䊊
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
䊊
jacked up.

WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-3

LCE0137

Sedan

Getting the spare tire and tools
Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and
1 and wheel
spare tire cover. Remove the jack 䊊
2 from the tool box.
nut wrench 䊊

6-4 In case of emergency

WCE0200

Coupe

WCE0193

Sedan

WCE0201

Coupe
Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Remove
the spare tire.

LCE0183

Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (if
so equipped)
CAUTION

A between the wheel and jack rod to
Apply cloth 䊊
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.
The wheel cover will be removed along with the
wheel when the nuts are removed.
B
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 䊊
as illustrated.

In case of emergency 6-5

● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.

WCE0147

Jack-up point coupe

Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
● Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.

6-6 In case of emergency

WCE0160

Jack-up point sedan
● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
● Do not start or
vehicle is on the
vehicle to move.
for
vehicles
differentials.

run the engine while
jack. It may cause the
This is especially true
with
limited
slip

LCE0020

Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.

notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.

Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instructions.

The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.

WCE0056

Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.

In case of emergency 6-7

JUMP STARTING
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D,
in the sequence illustrated (䊊
E ). Lower the vehicle completely.
䊊

WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.

6-8 In case of emergency

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
and loading information label affixed to the
driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equipment in the vehicle.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
7. Close the trunk.

WARNING
● Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
● The spare tire is designed for emergency use. See specific instructions under the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING
● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
● Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with
water.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
WCE0054

WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.

mission). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,
etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence ilA,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D ).
lustrated (䊊

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift selector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Trans-

In case of emergency 6-9

PUSH STARTING

CAUTION
● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.

6-10 In case of emergency

CAUTION
● Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
● Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
● For manual transmission (M/T) models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing
it. When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps.

WARNING
● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
● Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift selector
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank, if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:

WARNING
● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
● Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time.

● When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.

In case of emergency 6-11

For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

A (CVT)
䊊
B (M/T)
䊊

6-12 In case of emergency

WCE0194

CAUTION
● Never tow Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.

● Observe the following restricted towing
speeds and distances for manual transmissions (M/T) only:
– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)
– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)

● When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on towing dollies, or when
towing manual transmission (M/T)
models with the front wheels on the
ground:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device.
A (CVT)
䊊
B (M/T)
䊊

WCE0195

– Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral) position.
● When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) or manual transmission models (M/T) with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.

In case of emergency 6-13

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:

● Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System.

● Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
● Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use
a tow strap or other device designed specifically
for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery device.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or
vehicle recovery.

LCE0138

WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
● Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.

6-14 In case of emergency

Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)
and R (Reverse) (M/T models).
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (M/T models).
● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
● after driving on coastal roads.
● when contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.

WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.

7-2 Appearance and care

CAUTION
● Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.

WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.

REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.

CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.

UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated.

WAI0005

GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier
to clean if the high-mounted stop light (if so
equipped) is removed first.
Be careful when removing the high-mounted
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
1
䊊
2
䊊

Push toward rear of vehicle.
Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properly
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.

Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).

● Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

CHROME PARTS

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.

7-4 Appearance and care

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in
serious personal injury.

CAUTION
● Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
● Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.

● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s instructions before using the air fresheners.

FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision or injury:
● NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front
position.
● Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats
specifically designed for use in your vehicle model. See your NISSAN dealer
for more information.
● Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning aid.
See ⴖFloor mat positioning aidⴖ in this
section.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.

LPD0477

Floor mat positioning aid
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. Genuine
NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed
for your vehicle model. The driver’s and passenger’s side floor mats have a grommet hole incorporated in them. Position the mat by placing the
floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat
grommet hole while centering the mat in the
floorwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.

Appearance and care 7-5

CORROSION PROTECTION
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
● Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.

7-6 Appearance and care

Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
● Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.

CAUTION
● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
● Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-7

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Clutch fluid (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Variable voltage control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Front park/turn/sidemarker light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Upper tether anchor/key cylinder covers . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Removing covers from rear parcel shelf . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Installing covers to rear parcel shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your NISSAN has been designed to have minimum maintenance requirements with long service intervals to save you both time and money.
However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precautions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with “ * ” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
● For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this section.

Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Parking brake Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints
move up and down smoothly and the lock knobs
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the
MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See “Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield–washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift selector to N
(Neutral). For CVT models, move the
shift selector to P (Park).
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
● If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
● It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
● Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.

● Never leave the engine or the CVT related component harness connector
disconnected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.

● Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.

● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
● On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.

CAUTION
● Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To avoid
injury, always disconnect the negative
battery cable before working near the
fan.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.

Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model)
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Fuse/Fusible link box
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Drive belt location
11. Engine coolant reservoir
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI0553

8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

VQ35DE engine

1.
2.
3.

LDI0552

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) and 50% water
to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant
protection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust
and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING
● Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
● The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.

8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

CAUTION
● When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where
you operate your vehicle, add Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.

● The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the Nissan Service and
Maintenance Guide for more details.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000
km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the
NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for
more details.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
LDI0554

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
B , add coolant to the MAX level
the MIN level 䊊
A . If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
䊊
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
A.
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

WARNING
● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
● Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
● Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.

Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheating.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9

ENGINE OIL

LDI0555

QR25DE engine

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

LDI0556

VQ35DE engine

WDI0214

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
B . This is the normal operL (Low) marks 䊊
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
A , remove the oil filler cap
the L (Low) mark 䊊
and pour recommended oil through the
C.
opening. Do not overfill 䊊
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.

CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.

WDI0492

QR25DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
A cap by turning it
3. Remove the oil filler 䊊
counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
B.
䊊

WDI0493

VQ35DE
B with a wrench by
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” in this section.
● Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
● Check your local regulations.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11

WARNING
● Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.

8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0494

QR25DE

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
A.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

A with an oil filter
4. Loosen the oil filter 䊊
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so
equipped)
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.

CAUTION
● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
● Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will
damage the CVT, which is not covered
by the warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for
servicing.

WDI0495

VQ35DE

CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.

CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13

POWER STEERING FLUID

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
CAUTION
● DO NOT OVERFILL.
● Recommended
fluid
is
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

Genuine

For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and clutch
systems. The use of improper fluids can
damage the brake and clutch system
and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
● Clean the filler cap before removing.

LDI0557

The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° 80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove
the cap and fill through the opening.

8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

● Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

LDI0558

BRAKE FLUID

CLUTCH FLUID (if so equipped)

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.

Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir
(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is
below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid
up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.

LDI0579

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshieldwasher fluid into the reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15

BATTERY
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.

● Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

● Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.

CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recommended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.

8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING
● Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
● When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
● Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.

WDI0224

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.

WDI0529

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM

DRIVE BELT

CAUTION
● Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
● Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
A is located near the battery
The current sensor 䊊
along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.

LDI0694

WDI0673

QR25DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Power steering fluid pump pulley
Water pump pulley
Generator
Air conditioner
Crankshaft pulley
Drive belt Automatic tensioner
WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position before servicing
drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.

8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0721

VQ35DE engine

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Power steering fluid pump pulley
Idler pulley
Generator
Air conditioner
Idler pulley
Crankshaft pulley
Drive belt Automatic tensioner

SDI1895

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
A
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19

AIR CLEANER

WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.

CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.

LDI0563

QR25DE
NOTE:

3
䊊

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned
and reused.

NOTE:

Replace the air cleaner filter according to the
maintenance log shown in the “Warranty Information and Maintenance Booklet.”

After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.

To remove the air cleaner filter:
1
䊊
2
䊊

8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

LDI0562

VQ35DE
Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner
cover upward.
Remove the air cleaner filter.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer.

CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean
if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse
the blades with clear water. If your windshield is
still not clear after cleaning the blades and using
the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver
vision.

WDI0594

REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

䊊
2

3
䊊

Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21

BRAKES
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

6. Return the wiper to its original position and
release it until it has made contact with the
windshield.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

CAUTION

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.

● After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

WDI0570

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle
A . This may cause clogging or improper wind䊊
shield washer operation. If wax gets into the
B.
nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin 䊊

8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.

FUSES
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

LDI0455
A is used in
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
B is used in the passenger compartment fuse
䊊
box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine compartment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.

LDI0457

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the underhood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.

LDI0560

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.

8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0452
A , replace it with a new
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.

Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

WDI0452

WDI0402

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.

Type A
A , replace it with an
4. If the fuse is open 䊊
B.
equivalent good fuse 䊊
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25

How to replace the extended storage switch:
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
1 found on each
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊
side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
2 .
fuse box 䊊
LDI0456

Type B

LDI2035

Extended storage switch (if so
equipped)
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the extended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:

CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™

A into the slit 䊊
B
2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the case.

LDI2001

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27

LIGHTS
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

WDI0568
C 䊊
D.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.

8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if
so equipped)
WARNING

ᏘHIGH

VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they produce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disassemble. Always have your xenon headlights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For
additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Because the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION
● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.

FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKER
LIGHT
Bulb replacement requires the removal of the
headlight assembly. If replacement is required,
see your NISSAN dealer.

● Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
● Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly *2
Low (Halogen)
Low (Xenon)
High
Park
Park/Turn
Sidemarker
Sedan
Coupe
Front fog light (if so equipped) *2
Step light
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop
Turn
Backup (reversing)
Sedan
Coupe
License plate light *2
High-mounted stop light *2
Inside (coupe)
Inside (sedan)
Spoiler (if so equipped)
Front map light
Rear personal light
Trunk light
Vanity mirror light
Glove box light *2
Console light *2

Wattage (W)

Bulb No.*1

55
35
65
5
28/8

H11
D2R
H9
WY5W
3457NAK

5
5
55
3.8

WY5W
W5W
H11
194

27/8
27

3157K
3156

16
13
5

921LF
912
W5W

—
18
—
8
8
3.4
—
—
—

LED
921
LED
U89
U88
158
HTU–14v
—
—

*1 Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
*2 See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Coupe

Mirror-mounted turn signal light
(if so equipped)
2. Interior light
3. Map light
4. Headlamp assembly
5. Fog light (if so equipped)
6. Step light
7. High-mount stoplight
8. Trunk light
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light

WDI0626

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31

Sedan

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Rear map light
Front map light
Step light
Headlamp assembly
Fog light (if so equipped)
High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)
Trunk light
Spoiler mounted stoplight
(if so equipped)
9. Rear combination light
10. License plate light
11. Mirror-mounted turn signal light
(if so equipped)

WDI0680

8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation

LDI0341

Step light
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊

WDI0306

Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light
and/or cover.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33

WDI0723

Map light
Use a cloth to protect the housing.

8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0670

Personal light (if so equipped)
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊

WDI0632

Interior light
1 to protect the housing.
Use a cloth 䊊

Rear combination light
To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:
1
䊊
2
䊊
3
䊊

Remove the fasteners. Carefully push back
the carpet.
Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear
combination light.
Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise and
pull out to remove:
A
䊊
B
䊊
C
䊊
D
䊊

Turn signal light
Sidemarker light
Tail/stop light
Backup light

WDI0635

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35

UPPER TETHER ANCHOR/KEY
CYLINDER COVERS
CAUTION
Never force the covers into place because
the hinge pins can be damaged. Follow
the removal and installation instructions
to prevent inoperability of the covers.

WDI0343

Trunk light

8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

WDI0320

High-mounted stoplight (rear window)

LDI2009

REMOVING COVERS FROM REAR
PARCEL SHELF
Remove the top tether anchor cover or key cylinder cover as follows:
1. Lift the cover to the full open position.

LDI2010

2. Rotate the cover in the direction shown,
1 and slide the
disengaging the hinge at 䊊
2 and remove
second pin from the hinge 䊊
the cover.

LDI2011

INSTALLING COVERS TO REAR
PARCEL SHELF
CAUTION
Make sure that the hinge is completely
aligned with the pin. If the pin is forced
into position, it may break.
Install the top tether anchor cover or key cylinder
cover as follows:
1. With the pin on one end kept free of its hinge
1 , align the pin of the other end and slide it
䊊
2 .
into the hinge 䊊

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.

TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)

LDI2012
2 , align the
2. With the first pin in position 䊊
1 and push
second pin with its hinge slot 䊊
down on the cover to completely engage it.
A snap sound will be heard.

LDI2013

3. Close the cover.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section.

8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
● Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
● Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond this
capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire
life, unsafe operating conditions
due to premature tire failure, or
unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may
also result in failure of other vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39

5
䊊
6
䊊

WDI0730

Tire and loading information label
1
䊊

2
䊊

3
䊊

Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section.
Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.

8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4
䊊

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.

Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
Spare tire size.

3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
LDI0393

Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.

6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41

Size
Front Original Tire

Rear Original Tire

Spare Tire

P215/60R16
P215/55R17
P235/45R18
P215/60R16
P215/55R17
P235/45R18
T135/90R16

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
220 kPa, 32 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
220 kPa, 32 PSI
230 kPa, 33 PSI
420 kPa, 60 PSI
WDI0394

Example

TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.

8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.

WDI0395

Example

1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
䊊

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43

3 Tire ply composition and material
䊊

The number of layers or plies of rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation pres䊊
sure

WDI0396

Example

2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
䊊

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Department Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code:
identification mark.

Manufacturer’s

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufacture.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.

This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
䊊

This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
䊊

Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

7 The word “radial”
䊊

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
䊊

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
● When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
● Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.

Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can
be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong
Class “S” chains on this vehicle will cause
damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use
tire chains/cables, you should use a tire
chain that meets the minimum clearances
for your vehicle.
LDI0574

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that
A
is designed to provide the specified space 䊊
1 and where the
between the installed tire chain 䊊
2 as shown on the chart.
tire meets the rim 䊊

8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Wheel size

Minimum space required

16 in

.7 in (17 mm)

17 in

.2 in (4 mm)

18 in

.2 in (4 mm)

A tire chain that provides the specified amount of
space will provide the necessary clearance between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension
or body component. The minimum clearances are
determined using the factory-equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain
tensioners when recommended by the tire chain
manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links
of the tire chain must be secured or removed to
prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire
chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.
Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or
vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.

Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
● After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
WDI0258

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual for tire replacing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WDI0259

1.
2.

Wear indicator
Location mark

Tire wear and damage
WARNING
● Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-47

● The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
● Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
● Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire
Safety
Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

8-48 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.

WARNING
● The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system (if so equipped),
ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could result
in serious personal injury.
● If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect
the VDC system (if so equipped) and/or
interference
with
the
brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and consumer information” section
of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)
will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.
● Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS (if so
equipped).

● Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail without warning.
● The use of retread
recommended.

tires

not

Care of wheels
● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.

● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.

Wheel balance

● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:

WARNING
● The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
● Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
● When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-49

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
● Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
● Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION
● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.

8-50 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-26
Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-27
In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fuel
Engine oil *8
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change
Without oil filter
change

Capacity (Approximate)
US measure
Imp measure
20 gal
16-5/8 gal

Liter
75.6

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

QR25DE
VQ35DE
QR25DE
VQ35DE

4-7/8 qt
5-1/8 qt
4-1/2 qt
4-3/4 qt

4 qt
4-1/4 qt
3-3/4 qt
4 qt

4.6
4.8
4.3
4.5

QR25DE
VQ35DE

2 gal
2-3/8 gal
—

1-3/4 gal
2 gal
—

7.7
9.0

See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.

• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1, *2
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1, *2

Cooling system
With reservoir

Manual transmission gear oil
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
Power steering fluid (PSF)
Brake and clutch fluid
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioning system refrigerant
Air conditioning system oil
Windshield-washer fluid

—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—

Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or
equivalent *3
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *4
Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*5
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *6 or equivalent DOT 3
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
HFC-134a (R-134a) *7
Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *7
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or
equivalent

*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.
*2: NISSAN recommends for the VQ35DE engine, Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at a NISSAN dealer.
*3: If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Multi 75W-85 is hard to obtain , API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use
Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.
*4 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*5 DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.
*6 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
*7 For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
*8: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Reformulated gasoline

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.

CAUTION
● Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
● Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
● The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
● If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3

E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.

Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level

9-4 Technical and consumer information

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.

CAUTION
● Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.

● U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for
that region.

Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

WTI0183

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. See “Capacities
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”

Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

Technical and consumer information 9-5

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
● repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
● driving in dusty conditions
● extensive idling
● towing a trailer
● stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

9-6 Technical and consumer information

CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type
Cylinder arrangement
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Firing order

QR25DE
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder in-line
in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0)
cu in (cm3) 151.82 (2,488)
1–3–4–2

Idle speed
M/T
CVT (in “N” position)
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle

Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)
213.45 (3,498)
1–2–3–4–5–6

No adjustment is necessary.

Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)

VQ35DE

DILKAR6A-11
in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Timing chain

FXE22HR-11
0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain

Technical and consumer information 9-7

WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Size

Offset in (mm)

Aluminum/Steel

16 x 7JJ

1.77 (45)

Aluminum

17 x 7 1/2JJ

1.77 (45)

Aluminum

18 x 8.0JJ

1.77 (45)

T type (Spare)

16 x 4T

1.57 (40)

Tire size

P215/60R16
P215/55R17
P235/45R18

Spare tire

Alloy

T135/90D16

Steel

T135/70D16

9-8 Technical and consumer information

Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Front track
Rear track
Wheelbase

in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)
in (mm)

Gross vehicle weight
rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear

lb (kg)
lb (kg)
lb (kg)

Coupe

Sedan

180.9 (4,595)
70.7 (1,795)
56.0 (1,423)
61.0 (1,550)
61.2 (1,554)
105.3 (2,675)

190.7 (4,844)
70.7 (1,795)
58.0 (1,473)
61.0 (1,550)
61.1 (1,551)
109.3 (2,775)

See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label” on the center pillar between the driver’s side
front and rear doors.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.

LTI0025

WTI0037

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.

The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-9

WTI0096

QR25DE

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

9-10 Technical and consumer information

WTI0049

VQ35DE

LTI0197

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.

LTI0224

WTI0189

EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI0225

Sedan

Coupe

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.

Technical and consumer information 9-11

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
1
䊊

2
䊊

WTI0178

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0179

9-12 Technical and consumer information

Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher
at the location mark (small dimple) using a
0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the
threads behind the finisher, apply only light
pressure to the drill.
Mount the license plate bracket using two 10
mm slotted Phillip head screws.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING
● It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
● Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat belts.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.

TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.
● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information
is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
This is the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is
used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue

weight must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is located
on the Tire and Loading Information
label (if so equipped).
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Loading Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occupants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Technical and consumer information 9-13

Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
LTI0152

Example

9-14 Technical and consumer information

5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of weights” later in
this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.

LOADING TIPS
● The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
● Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
● Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause personal injury.

● Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered
by
the
vehicle’s
warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
Technical and consumer information 9-15

TOWING A TRAILER

WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION
● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.

9-16 Technical and consumer information

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value
specified
in
the
“Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system must be used.

LTI0164

The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or
using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.

WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual.

CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.

WTI0160

TI1012M

Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of
the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load
specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue
load must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.

Technical and consumer information 9-17

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.

Example:

1. Locate
the
GVWR
on
the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label 4,203 lb. (1906 kg).

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue load.

● Maximum Towing Load from “Towing
Load/Specification⬙ chart - 1,000 lb. (454
kg).

4,203 lb. (1906 kg)
– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg)

GVWR
GVW

= 100 lb. (45 kg)

Available for tongue
weight

1,000 lb. (454 kg)

Capacity available for
towing

100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg)
Available capacity
=

10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
trailer tongue load specification recommended
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.

9-18 Technical and consumer information

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION
UNIT: lb (kg)
MAXIMUM TOWING
LOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUE
LOAD

100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to
the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.

Hitch ball

Sway control device

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.

● The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
● The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.

Ball mount

Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that
has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to
the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the
Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this
section.

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.

Technical and consumer information 9-19

CAUTION
● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
● The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impactabsorbing bumper.
● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust system, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
● To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
● After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
● Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures
● When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.

Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available powertype module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical system. See a reputable trailer dealer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.

9-20 Technical and consumer information

WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips
● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
● Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.

Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadvertently becoming unlatched.
● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.

Technical and consumer information 9-21

To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
● While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may deteriorate overall handling characteristics.
Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear.
Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes
when descending a hill, as this reduces their
effectiveness and could cause overheating.
Shifting to a lower gear instead provides
“engine braking” and reduces the need to
brake as frequently.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
● Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

● If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the vehicle

● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.

9-22 Technical and consumer information

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described earlier in this section.
● Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking
when driving down steep or long hills. This
will help slow the vehicle without applying
the brakes.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
● Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
● NISSAN recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer.

● Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
● When launching a boat, don’t allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, see the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.

CAUTION
● Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
● DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
● For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.

● After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing
may cause damage to internal transmission
parts.

Continuously Variable Transmission (if
so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’s recommendations when using their product.

Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
● Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.

FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.

Technical and consumer information 9-23

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.

9-24 Technical and consumer information

WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.

WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:

For USA

For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
● Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition
to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division
toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-SecSur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.

Technical and consumer information 9-25

Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from
Transport Canada’s Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online
at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the “ready condition” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
● How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
● Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
● How fast the vehicle was traveling.
● Sounds are not recorded.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the
battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to
a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test,
check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the
ON position without starting the engine. If the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady
for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the
I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready
condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

9-26 Technical and consumer information

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment procedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.

For USA

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.

For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.

1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321

Technical and consumer information 9-27

Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifications – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty protection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit unnecessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Nongenuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts often show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

9-28 Technical and consumer information

Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws
that restrict insurance companies from authorizing the use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help protect you, so you can take action to protect yourself.

It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).

10 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-50
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . .4-21
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-26
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-90
Anti-lock brake warning light. . . . . . . . . .2-11
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-25
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Bluetooth姞 audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-84
Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player. .4-54
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-48
Audio System
iPod姞 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72, 4-74
Music Box姞 hard-disk drive audio
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-77
Audio system
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
Audio System
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55
Audio system
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-66, 4-68
Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Automatic
Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-45
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-30
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47, 4-53

Bluetooth姞 hands-free phone
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91, 4-106
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-38
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-25
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-30
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-22
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-12
Brightness control
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30

Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91
CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-87
CD player
(See audio system) . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64
Check tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Child restraints . . . . . . .1-21, 1-22, 1-23, 1-25

Battery . . . . . . . . . . .
Charge warning light .
Before starting the engine
Belt (See drive belt) . . .
Block heater
Engine . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth姞 audio . . . . .

.
.
.
.

.8-16
.2-11
.5-10
.8-18

. . . . . . . . . . .5-29
. . . . . . . . . . .4-84

Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-34, 1-38
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-27
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45, 4-50
(models with navigation system) . . . . . . .4-8
(models without navigation system) . . . .4-45
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-45
Clutch
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Compact disc (CD)
player . . . . . . . . . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-12
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Controls
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

10-2

Checking engine coolant level . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

. .8-9
. .2-5
. .7-6
.5-20
.2-40

D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-32
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player . . . . . . .4-63
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-33
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Driving
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission control information label
Emission control system warranty
Engine
Before starting the engine. . .
Block heater . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .5-22
. . . . . . .9-11
. . . . . . .9-25
. . . . . . .5-10
. . . . . . .5-29

Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment check locations . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .
Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . .
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . .
Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .9-2
. .8-9
.8-11
.8-12
. .8-9
.8-10
. .8-6
. .2-5
. .8-8
.8-10
. .9-5
.2-12
. .9-5
.9-10
. .9-7
.5-10
. .4-2
.9-26
. .5-2
.8-26
.2-38

F
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) .
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . .
Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .2-34
. . . . . .6-2
. . . . . .7-5
. . . . .8-14
. . . . . .9-2
. . . . .8-15

Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-50
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-25
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . .2-25, 3-25
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24

General maintenance
Glove box. . . . . . .
Glove box lock . . . .
Grocery hooks . . . .

.
.
.
.

. .8-2
.2-41
.2-41
.2-42

H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetooth姞 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91, 4-106
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-34
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19, 4-26
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-20, 4-27
HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver. . . . . . . .2-51
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-8, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-33
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range . . . . . . . . . .3-8, 3-18
Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Remote keyless entry operation . . .3-12, 3-18
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16, 3-22
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
iPod姞 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-72, 4-74
ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
K

G
Garage door opener, HomeLink姞 Universal
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . .
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.2-51
.3-25
.
.
.
.
.
.

.2-5
.2-6
.2-4
.2-4
.2-5
.2-4

Ignition Switch
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . .5-7
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-30

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) . . . . .3-12, 3-18
Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10

10-3

Emission control information label . . . . .9-11
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-56
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-12
Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-30
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-10
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Console light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-51
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-50
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Lights
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

10-4

Lock
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . . . .3-25
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . .3-23
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-25, 3-25
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-24
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-24
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13
M
Maintenance
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . .
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . .
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . .
Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument brightness control . . . . . .
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . .
Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music Box姞 hard-disk drive audio system .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .8-2
. .8-3
. .8-5
. .8-2
.1-20
. .8-4
.2-15
. .1-2
.2-50
.2-37
. .2-3
.2-33

.
.
.
.
.
.

.3-30
.3-29
.3-31
.3-29
.2-46
.4-77

N
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-9
NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-117
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation .
Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . .
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .9-4
. .2-4
. .9-2
.8-11
.8-12
.8-10
.8-10
. .9-5
. .9-5
.3-31
.6-10
.9-27
.9-27

P
Parking
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Phone, Bluetooth姞 hands-free
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-91, 4-106
Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Precautions
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
Precautions on child
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-34, 1-38
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . .
FM-AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear parcel shelf
Refitting covers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing covers. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. .4-91
. .4-44
. .4-54
. .4-48
. .9-26
. .8-37
. .8-37

Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recorders
Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .
Registering your vehicle in another country
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .

. .2-45
. . .1-8
. .4-13
. .2-29
.
.
.
.

.9-26
. .9-6
. .9-9
.9-25

S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Child seat belts . . . . .1-23, 1-29, 1-34, 1-38
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-25
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Seat belt
Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-14
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-19
Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-17
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Seats
Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Shift lock release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-19
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-50
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56
Starting
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-10
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Steering
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

10-5

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-57, 2-14
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-50
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-56
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-41
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-41
Switch
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-45
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-31
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Tire

10-6

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4, 8-49
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-46
Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-45
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-24
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3
Towing
Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
Transceiver
HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver. . . . . .2-51
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Driving with manual transmission . . . . . .5-17
Shift selector lock release . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-8
Trunk lid lock opener lever. . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-24
USB interface
Audio file operation . . . . . . . . . .4-67, 4-69
Video file operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-18
Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-36
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-26
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), engine start . . . . . .2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-117
W
Warning
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-57, 2-14
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-34
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-24
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-51
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-56
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Washer switch
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-38
Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle
in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-45
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-28
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

10-7

GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
● Engine oil with API Certification Mark
● Viscosity SAE 5W-30
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in
the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : November 2010 (16)
Publication No.: OM0E
0L32U2
OM1E 0L32U1
Printed in U.S.A.

L32-D

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 446
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:5e7ad3bb-351f-4327-af46-a06b1b505932
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.2.5 (Windows)
Keywords                        : nissan; Altima; 2011; owner manual; owner’s manual; pdf; vehicle manual
Create Date                     : 2010:11:06 13:23:48Z
Creator Tool                    : XPP
Modify Date                     : 2010:11:16 14:35:40-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2010:11:16 14:35:40-06:00
Document ID                     : uuid:cb9b304c-312c-4d60-914e-4d8dead66517
Instance ID                     : uuid:04153e01-6e9e-4069-a4ac-a55e719425c0
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : 2011 Nissan Altima Owner's Manual
Description                     : Download the 2011 Nissan Altima Owner's Manual at the official Nissan web site.
Creator                         : 
Subject                         : 846708
Author                          :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Nissan 2011 Altima Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation